Pioneer | RCS-404H | User's Manual | Pioneer RCS-404H User's Manual

Pioneer RCS-404H User's Manual
RCS-606H
SX-SW606
S-ST606
DVR-640H-AV
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
Speaker System
DVD Recorder
RCS-505H
SX-SW404
S-ST404
DVR-640H-AV
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
Speaker System
DVD Recorder
RCS-404H
SX-SW404
S-ST404
DVR-440H-AV
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
Speaker System
DVD Recorder
™
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at www.pioneer.co.uk
(www.pioneer-eur.com)
Operating Instructions
™
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After
you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference.
IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
WARNING
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filed
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
or moisture.
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120V) written on the rear panel.
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives
(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and
D3-4-2-1-9a_En
93/68/EEC).
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location: top of the unit
CAUTION
ATTENTION
ADVARSEL
VARNING
VORSICHT
PRECAUCI”N
VARO!
VRW2262 - A
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. …VITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR≈LING VED ≈BNING. UNDG≈ UDS∆ TTELSE FOR STR≈LING.
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTR≈LNING NƒR DENNA DEL ƒR ÷PPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSƒTTA DIG F÷R STR≈LEN.
BEI GE÷FFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERƒTEINNEREN VORHANDEN.
NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN!
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACI”N L¡ SER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICI”N A LOS RAYOS L¡ SER.
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NƒKYVƒLLE JA NƒKYMƒTT÷MƒLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSƒTEILYLLE. ƒLƒ KATSO SƒTEESEEN.
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear, and 5
cm at each side).
VENTILATION CAUTION (DVD Recorder)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
10 cm
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En
10 cm
Receiver subwoofer
10 cm
DVD Recorder
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
K058_En
English
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).
Section One
Chapter 1
Contents
Section One
04 Remote control.............................................. 15
01 Contents........................................................... 4
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . 17
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
02 Speaker Setup Guide ...................................... 5
Safety precautions when setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Home theater sound setup
(RCS-606H). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Home theater sound setup
(RCS-404H/RCS-505H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Standard surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Front surround setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Wall mounting the center speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Wall mounting the speakers
(RCS-404H/RCS-505H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Before mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Additional notes on speaker placement . . . . . . . . . . 8
05 Before you start ............................................ 18
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Watching a DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Listening to a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Watching a title recorded on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 19
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Section Two
03 Connecting up ............................................... 10
Operating instructions for the Audio
Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer and
Speaker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Basic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Using this system for TV audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Section Three
Operating instructions for the DVD
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.
• RF antenna cable (page 12)
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW606/SX-SW404) box:
• Power cord (page 12)
• Remote control (page 15)
• AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2
(page 17)
• Speaker cables x5 (page 11)
• Power cord (page 12)
• Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 6, 7)
• AM loop antenna (page 10)
• Non-skid pads (small) x20 (page 6, 7)
• FM wire antenna (page 10)
• Speaker stands x2 (page 7)
• Control cable (page 10)
• Screws (for speaker stands) x2 (page 7)
Speakers (S–ST606) box:
• Coaxial cable (page 10)
• Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 12)
• Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 23)
• Speaker cables x5 (page 11)
• These operating instructions
• Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 5)
• Warranty card
• Non-skid pads (large) x16 (page 5)
DVD recorder (DVR–640H-AV/DVR–440H-AV) box:
En
• Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 12)
• Display unit (page 22)
• Display cable (page 10)
4
Speakers (S–ST404) box:
• Non-skid pads (small) x4 (page 5)
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 13)
• Speaker stand bases x 4 (page 5)
• G-LINK™ cable (page 53)
• Screws (for bases) x 12 (page 5)
Speaker Setup Guide
Chapter 2
English
Speaker Setup Guide
Safety precautions when setting up
When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on
their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a
stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing
the speakers.
Rear
Home theater sound setup
(RCS-606H)
• This is a standard multichannel surround sound
speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater
sound.
Front
left
Front
right
Center
Front
2 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for
the front and surround speakers, and the receiver
subwoofer (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base (flat surface) of each speaker.
Receiver subwoofer
Non-skid pads
(small) x 4
Center speaker
Surround
left
Listening position
Surround
right
1 Attach the speaker stand bases to the stems
using the screws provided.
Once you have aligned the stem and base, secure with
the small screws at the points shown below. Note that
the speaker should face in the direction of the base of the
isosceles triangle (outlined below).
Non-skid pads
(large) x 16
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
Front and
surround
speakers
Receiver
subwoofer
5
En
Speaker Setup Guide
3 Secure each of the front and surround speakers
using the metal catch provided.
Screw two picture hooks or similar into the wall behind
the speaker. Pass a chain or cord around the hooks and
through the metal catch so that the speaker is stabilized
(make sure to test that it supports the weight of the
speaker).
Home theater sound setup
(RCS-404H/RCS-505H)
Depending on the size and characteristics of your room,
you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this
system.
After installing, make sure the speaker is securely fixed.
Chain or cord
Standard surround setup
This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker
setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.
Front
left
Front
right
Metal catch
Receiver subwoofer
Center
Caution
• The metal catch is not a mounting fixture, and the
speaker should not be hung directly from the wall
using this catch. Always use a chain or cord when
stabilizing the speaker.
• Pioneer disclaims all responsibility for any losses or
damage resulting from improper assembly,
installation, insufficient strength of the installation
materials, misuse, or natural disasters.
Surround
right
Surround
left
Listening position
1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
each of the front, surround and center speakers. The
four large non-skid pads are for the receiver
subwoofer (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base (flat surface) of each speaker.
4 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.
Front and surround speakers
Non-skid pads
(small) x 20
Center speaker
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 23) to complete your surround sound setup.
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
6
En
Receiver
subwoofer
Speaker Setup Guide
English
2 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram (left) for optimal surround sound.
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 23) to complete your surround sound setup.
3 Make sure the Front Surround mode is switched
off.
See the operating instructions for more on using Front
Surround.
Front speakers
Speaker stands
Non-skid pads
(small) x 20
Front surround setup
This setup is ideal when rear surround speaker
placement isn't possible or you want to avoid running
long speaker cables in your listening area. Use this setup
together with the Front Surround modes in page 26 to
take advantage of wall and ceiling reflections for a very
realistic surround effect.
Surround
right
Surround left
Front left
Center
Front right
Receiver
subwoofer
Center speaker
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
Receiver
subwoofer
2 Attach the surround speakers to the speaker
stands.
For each speaker, line up the spurs on the stand with the
holes on the back of the speaker and insert, then secure
the speaker to the stand with the screw provided.
Listening position
1 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
the front and center speakers and to the speaker
stands. The four large non-skid pads are for the
receiver subwoofer (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base (flat surface) of each speaker or stand.
3 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram (left) for optimal surround sound
(the surround speakers are next to the front speakers).
7
En
Speaker Setup Guide
4 Turn the speakers as shown, following the guide
marks for optimal Front Surround.
If you have selected FRTMOVIE (Front Surround Movie)
or FRTMUSIC (Front Surround Music), turn each
surround speaker so that the guide markers on the stand
base are lined up horizontally in the direction the
listening position (see below). With EXTPOWER (Extra
Power), the surround speakers should point in the same
direction as the front speakers (see below).
Wall mounting the speakers
(RCS-404H/RCS-505H)
In addition to the center speaker, the front and surround
speakers also have holes for wall mounting. However, if
you are using the Front Surround setup described on the
previous page, do not wall mount the surround speakers.
See Using Front Surround on page 26 for more
information.
5 mm
10 mm
5 mm to 7 mm
FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC
EXTPOWER
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 23) to complete your surround sound setup.
Caution
• Please don’t attach the surround speakers to the wall
for Front surround setup.
Before mounting
• Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that
its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or
the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the
speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to
mount the speakers on is strong enough to support
them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls.
• Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws
suitable for the wall material and support the weight
of the speaker.
Wall mounting the center speaker
The center speaker has a mounting hole which can be
used to mount the speaker on the wall.
5 mm
Caution
• If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the
wall, consult a professional for advice.
• Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or
damage that result from improper installation.
10 mm
Additional notes on speaker placement
• Install the main front left and right speakers at an
equal distance from the TV.
• RCS-404H/505H only: For optimum effect, install the
surround speakers slightly above ear level.
• Install the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen.
Precautions:
5 mm to 7 mm
8
En
• When installing the center speaker on top of the TV,
be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable
means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV
due to external shocks such as earthquakes,
endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker.
Speaker Setup Guide
English
• The front (L/R), center and surround (L/R) speakers
supplied with this system are magnetically shielded.
However, depending on the installation location,
color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed
extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this
happens, turn the power switch of the television set
OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the
problem persists, place the speaker system away
from the television set.
• The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded
and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor.
Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and
tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close
to the receiver subwoofer.
• RCS-606H only: Do not attach the front, surround
speakers and receiver subwoofer to the wall or
ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury.
• RCS-404H/505H only: Do not attach the receiver
subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may fall off and
cause injury.
• For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare
speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.
• Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
• Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other
amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire.
9
En
Connecting up
Chapter 3
Connecting up
Basic connections
Important
• When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power
cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW606/SX-SW404)
FM antenna
AM loop antenna
3
4
Display unit
ANTENNA
MCACC CONTROL IN
SETUP MIC
FM
UNBAL 75Ω
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
L
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
ANALOG
L
R
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
CENTER
R
FRONT
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
L
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
AC IN
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
R
L
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
a
Control cable
b
Coaxial cable
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
1
2
Display cable
10
En
ANTENNA
S-VIDEO
DVD Recorder
(DVR-640H-AV/
DVR-440H-AV)
Connecting up
4
For each terminal, press down on the tab to open;
insert the wire, then release to secure.
Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN
jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.
b. Plug the coaxial cable into the DIGITAL AUDIO
INPUT (DVD/DVR 1) jack on the rear of the receiver
subwoofer.
1
2
Plug the other end of the cable into the COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.
Note that unless the control cable is
connected, you can’t use the remote
control with the DVD recorder.
2 Connect the display unit to the receiver
subwoofer.
• Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the
connector on the rear of the display unit.
Plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM
CONNECTOR jack on the receiver subwoofer.
3
Connect the AM and FM antennas 1.
a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM
antenna terminal2.
English
1 Connect the DVD recorder to the receiver
subwoofer.
a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT jack
on the rear of the receiver subwoofer.
b. Push the FM antenna3 plug onto the center pin of the
FM antenna socket.
5
Connect each speaker.
• Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at
one end and two wires at the other end.
Color-coded wire
(Connect to speaker)
Color-coded connector
(Connect to rear panel)
Assemble the AM loop antenna.
a
b
c
a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.
• Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.
• Connect the wires to the speaker. Match the colored
wired with the color-coded label (model label), then
insert the colored wire into the red (+) side and the
other wire into the black (–) side.
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform
step b after first securing the stand with screws.
It is recommended that you determine the reception
strength before securing the stand with the screws.
Note
1 • Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder.
• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 29 or Connecting
external antennas on page 34.
2 • Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.
• The signal earth () is designed to reduce noise that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not an electrical safety earth.
• If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.
• For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.
3 • To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.
11
En
Connecting up
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW404)
Surround right
(Gray)
Surround left
(Blue)
ANTENNA
MCACC CONTROL IN
SETUP MIC
6
FM
UNBAL 75Ω
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
L
5
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
ANALOG
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 OPTICAL
Listening position
L
R
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
Front right
(Red)
Center (Green)
Front left
(White)
8
To AC outlet
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW606)
Surround right
(Gray)
Surround left
(Blue)
ANTENNA
MCACC CONTROL IN
SETUP MIC
FM
UNBAL 75Ω
6
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
L
5
AUDIO
DIGITAL
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
INPUT
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 OPTICAL
ANALOG
L
R
Listening position
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
Center (Green)
AC IN
12
En
Front right
(Red)
8
To AC outlet
Front left
(White)
Connecting up
• Do not connect the supplied speakers to any
amplifier other than the one supplied with this
system. Connection to any other amplifier may result
in malfunction or fire.
The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug
should face up or down depending on whether it’s
being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker
terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly.
7
English
• Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
• Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker
terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make
sure to insert completely.
Connect the DVD recorder to your TV. 1
• Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on
your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable
for the video connection.
Upper terminal
6
• Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Lower terminal
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/
video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you
match the left and right outputs with their
corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.
Connect the subwoofer cable.
• Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of
center, you should see the subwoofer connecting
cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
terminal.
8
Connect the power cord.2
• Connect the power cords to AC inlets on the receiver
subwoofer and DVD recorder.
Caution
Connect the power cords to a wall socket.
• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
ANTENNA IN
7
AUDIO IN
Audio/video cable
(red/white/yellow)
VIDEO IN
TV
RF antenna
cable
DVD Recorder
(DVR-640H-AV/DVR-440H-AV)
ANTENNA IN
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
R
L
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
OUT
RF antenna
cable
8
To AC outlet
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Note
1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 51-page 54 for more information.
2 • Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.
13
En
Connecting up
Using this system for TV audio
If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to
this system and enjoy surround TV sound.
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
AUDIO
DIGITAL
L
INPUT
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 OPTICAL
ANALOG
L
R
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
1
AUDIO
OUTPUT
TV
1 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on your TV to
the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver
subwoofer.
Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for
this connection. Make sure you match the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct
stereo sound.
• You can use the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks for
any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc.
14
En
Remote control
Chapter 4
3
1
RECORDER
RECEIVER
HDD/DVD (page 78)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
recording or playback. The receiver subwoofer’s
audio input is also switched to DVD/DVR1.1
2
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
3
5
4
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC HELP
INFO
6
9
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
HOME MENU
GUIDE
CHANNEL +
12
CM
BACK
PAUSE
LIVE TV
13
15
17
19
NEXT
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SET UP
1
/ST–
22
RETURN
14
CHANNEL –
PREV
4
MCACC
7
VOLUME
ANGLE
/TUNE+
2
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ST+
5
5
Playback controls (page 86)
18
20
PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
21
PLAY
Press to start playback.
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SOUND
STOP
Press to stop playback.
24
9
8
TV/DVD
25
CLEAR
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
4 SOUND RETRIEVER
Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio
sources (page 27).
23
0
29
AUDIO IN (page 34)
Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver
subwoofer’s audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2,
DIGITAL or ANALOG).
MENU
6
SURROUND ADVANCED
27
16
PLAY MODE
TIMER REC REC MODE
ENTER
FM/AM (page 29)
Press to select the built-in radio tuner.
7
8
10
11
CM
SKIP
ENTER
Input select buttons
English
Remote control
SUB
JUKE BOX
26
6
Recording controls (page 78)
DISPLAY
28
RDS DISP
AXD7442
OPENOPEN
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE
Plus+™ screen, use for One-Button-Record.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
Important
• Functions printed in green on the remote control are
accessed by switching the MAIN/SUB switch to SUB.
7 INFO
Press to see additional information for the highlighted
item in GUIDE Plus+™.
1 RECORDER
Press to switch the recorder on or into standby.
8 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
2 RECEIVER
Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into
standby.
9 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 89, 96) / TOP MENU
(page 87)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/RW (Video) disc
is loaded.
Note
1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the receiver subwoofer’s audio input will not be switched. See also Remote Control Mode on
page 134.
15
En
Remote control
10 GUIDE
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+™ screen; press again
to exit.
11 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate many the functions of the system.
18 TIMER REC (page 65)
Press to set a timer recording from the GUIDE Plus+™
system.
12 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to navigate all DVD recorder on-screen displays.
Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted
option.
19 / (page 91)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
CHANNEL +/– (page 77)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the audio or video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
13 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 79)
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.
14 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
15 PREV / NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/track/
folder; or to display the previous or next menu page.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next page.
16 VOLUME +/–
Use to adjust the volume.
17 GUIDE Plus+™ Action buttons and DVD playback
function buttons
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, these buttons
act as the Red, Green, Yellow and Blue Action
buttons (the functions of these buttons change
according to the GUIDE Plus+™ Area). (page 64)
AUDIO (page 77, 94)
Press to change the audio language or channel.
(When the recorder is stopped, press to change the
tuner audio.)
SUBTITLE (page 93)
Press to display/change the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
ANGLE (page 94)
Press to switch camera angles on discs with multiangle scenes.
16
En
PLAY MODE (page 91)
Press to change the play mode (search, repeat,
program play, etc.)
/, /
(page 91)
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback
speed.
While paused, press to advance a single frame in
either direction.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next day.
20 REC MODE (page 77)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture
quality).
21 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 106)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
22 Number buttons
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title
selection; channel selection, and so on.
/// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to control receiver functions.
SETUP
Use to access the menu system for surround sound
setup, tuner settings and so on (page 23, 29, 30, 31,
37).
SR+
Use to setup the SR+ features and to select the SR+
mode (page 36).
MCACC
Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 23).
TEST TONE
Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup)
(page 32).
SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 25).
SLEEP
Press to set the sleep timer (page 37).
ADVANCED
Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode
(page 26).
Remote control
• Use within the operating range in front of the remote
control sensor on the display unit, as shown.
CLEAR
Press to clear an entry and start again.
30
30
23 MENU (page 87)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R/-RW or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, use to jump directly
to the Menu bar.
24 VIDEO IN (page 82)
Press to change the DVD recorder input for recording
and playback.
25 TV/DVD
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the system’s
tuner (or an external input).
English
SOUND (page 27)
Press to access the sound menu, from which you can
adjust bass and treble, etc.
7m
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (,) inside
the compartment.
26 JUKEBOX (page 113)
Press to display the Jukebox screen of the DVD recorder,
from where you can copy music to the HDD for playback.
27 TV CONTROL (page 136)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
28 DISPLAY (page 95)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
RDS DISP
Changes RDS displays (page 30).
29 MAIN/SUB
Change from MAIN to SUB to access the green
functions/commands on the remote.
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
3
Close the cover.
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the
following:
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Don’t use different kinds of battery together—
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode is reset to
Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 134.
WARNING
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
17
En
Before you start
Chapter 5
Before you start
Switching on
The DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver subwoofer
is located on the display unit.
Remote control
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC HELP
INFO
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
HOME MENU
GUIDE
CHANNEL +
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
PAUSE
LIVE TV
RETURN
CHANNEL –
PREV
NEXT
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
VOLUME
ANGLE
Display unit
PLAY MODE
TIMER REC REC MODE
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ST+
MENU
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
INPUT
+
+
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
– VOLUME +
AUDIO INPUT SURROUND
STANDBY/ON
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
DVD Recorder (DVR-640H-AV)
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
STANDBY/ON
USB
DV IN
The table below shows what needs to be switched on for
various system functions:
Function
18
En
Display unit
DVD
recorder
DVD playback
On
On
CD playback
On
On
HDD playback
On
On
Radio
On
Off
Timer recording
Off
On
S-VIDEO
– CH +
ONE
TOUCH
COPY
STOP
REC
REC
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
(MONO)
INPUT
Setting up
After connecting and installing the DVD recorder and
receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set the
system up for use.
DVD recorder
• Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type
of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 59).
Receiver subwoofer
• Switch off the display demo mode (page 23).
• Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the
surround sound (page 23).
Before you start
7
Press (play) to start playback.
This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the
receiver subwoofer, the other using the DVD recorder.
Below are some common operations and where to find
them explained in this manual.
Watching a DVD
Remember that when using the remote to control the
DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards the
display unit, not the recorder itself.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing . (Press again to
cancel the resume function.)
English
Basic operation
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
See Basic playback on page 86 for more on playing discs.
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
REC
STOP REC HELP
INFO
CM
BACK
Adjust the volume.
9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
See Listening to your system on page 25 for details.
STOP
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
8
HOME MENU
GUIDE
CHANNEL +
CM
SKIP
ENTER
PAUSE
LIVE TV
RETURN
Listening to a CD
1
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2
Switch on the DVD recorder.
3
Press HDD/DVD.
4
Load a CD and start playback (page 88).
5
Adjust the volume.
CHANNEL –
PREV
NEXT
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SET UP
/TUNE+
VOLUME
ANGLE
6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 25).
PLAY MODE
Watching a title recorded on the HDD
TIMER REC REC MODE
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
1
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
Switch on the DVD recorder.
1
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2
2
Switch on the DVD recorder.
3
Switch on your TV.
4
Press HDD/DVD.
5
Start playback of the HDD title (page 87).
6
Adjust the volume.
3 Switch on your TV.
Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct
video input.
4
Press HDD/DVD.
5 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the DVD recorder to
open the disc tray.
6 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play
face-down).
7 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 25).
Listening to the radio
1
Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2
Tune to a station (page 29).
3
Adjust the volume.
4 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 25).
19
En
SX-SW606
SX-SW404
S-ST606
S-ST404
20
En
Section Two
01 Controls and displays
07 Additional information
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02 Getting started
System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround
sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
03 Listening to your system
Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Front Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Advanced Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . .
Enhancing dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . .
Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
28
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
39
39
40
40
English
Contents
04 Listening to the radio
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving poor AM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying RDS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
30
05 Surround sound settings
Using the Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual mono setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . .
31
31
31
32
32
32
06 Other connections
Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an analog audio component. . . . . . . .
Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . .
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays . . . . . . . .
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
34
34
35
35
36
21
En
Controls and displays
01
Chapter 1
Controls and displays
Display unit
– VOLUME +
AUDIO INPUT SURROUND
STANDBY/ON
1
2
3
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the system on/into standby.
4
5
6
4 AUDIO INPUT (page 34)
Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio
inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG).
2 Front panel display
See below for details.
5 SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 25).
3 VOLUME buttons
Use to adjust the volume.
6
IR remote sensor (page 17)
Display
1 2 3
SOUND
DTS F.SURR.
2D
2PL
9
8
kHz
MHz
7
6
5
1 DTS
Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 25).
2
5 kHz / MHz
Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character
display (kHz for AM, MHz for FM).
SURR.
Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening
modes is selected (page 26).
6
Tuner indicators
– Lights when a broadcast is being received.
– Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
received in auto stereo mode.
– Lights when FM mono reception is selected.
22
En
– Lights when in one of the RDS display or search
modes.
F.SURR. (RCS-404H/505H only)
Lights when one of the Front Surround listening
modes is selected (page 26).
3 SOUND
Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 27).
4
4
Character display
7
Lights when sleep timer is active (page 37).
8 2 PL II
Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 25).
9 2D
Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source
(page 25).
Getting started
02
Chapter 2
English
Getting started
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
System demo setting
Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this
starts when you plug in for the first time).
SURROUND ADVANCED
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
/
SETUP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
2
+
+
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ST+
JUKE BOX
INPUT
TV CONTROL
RDS DISP
MENU
6
MAIN
SUB
8
AXD7442
9
SOUND
Important
DISPLAY
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SURROUND ADVANCED
1
TIMER REC REC MODE
TV/DVD
CLEAR
The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system
measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening
area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for
channel delay and channel level. After you have set up
the microphone provided, the system uses the
information from a series of test tones to optimize the
speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration
EQ) for your particular room.1
0
PLAY MODE
SLEEP
/
SOUND
Using the Auto MCACC setup for
optimal surround sound
TV/DVD
• The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud;
however, do not turn the volume down during setup
as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the MCACC setup.
Switch the system into standby.
Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select DEMO from the
menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then
press ENTER.
Select from:
• DEMO ON – Switches the demo display on.
/
RECORDER
RECEIVER
4
MCACC
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC HELP
TOP MENU
DISC
7
CLEAR
SLEEP
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
2
3
5
6
/ST–
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
0
TIMER REC REC MODE
/TUNE+
1
PAUSE
/
/ST+
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
MENU
TV CONTROL
JUKE BOX
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
9
SURROUND ADVANCED
MAIN
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
SUB
AXD7442
0
INFO
SLEEP
HOME MENU
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
DISPLAY
1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP
MIC jack on the rear panel.
• DEMO OFF – Switches the demo display off and the
system into standby.
ANTENNA
MCACC CONTROL IN
SETUP MIC
FM
UNBAL 75Ω
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
L
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
ANALOG
L
R
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
2 Place the microphone at your normal listening
position.
Place the mic horizontally about ear level at your normal
listening position using a table or chair.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
Note
1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout).
23
En
02
Getting started
3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press
RECEIVER to turn the power on.
4 Press MCACC.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The
volume increases automatically and the system outputs
a series of test tones.
• To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished,
press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the
previous settings.
• If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in
the display for five seconds. To exit and check the
noise levels1, press MCACC, or to try again, press
ENTER when RETRY shows in the display.
• If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the
display, there may be a problem with your mic or the
speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER
when you see RETRY2
When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level
returns to normal, COMPLETE3 shows in the display, and
Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated.4
Note
1 • If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from
the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup.
2 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again.
3 If COMPLETE doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.
4 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 27 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ.
24
En
Listening to your system
03
Chapter 3
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
• Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening
mode.
• You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
English
Listening to your system
The choices that appear in the display will vary according
to the type of source that’s playing.
Auto listening mode
The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to
any source as it was mastered: the output from the
speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.
RCS-404H/RCS-505H only: If you set up the system for
Front surround (page 7), the Front Surround modes will
give the best results (see Using Front Surround on
page 26).
MCACC
/TUNE
7
8
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
9
SURROUND ADVANCED
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
DISPLAY
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D
or DTS indicator lights.
• AUTO – Auto listening mode (see above)
• DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel surround
sound for use with any two-channel source
• MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to movie sources,
for use with any two-channel source
• MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to music sources,
for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro
Logic II Music settings below
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo on page 26
RDS DISP
SUB
AXD7442
• Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening
mode.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D
or DTS indicator lights.
• You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings
When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see
above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center
Width, Dimension, and Panorama.
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
Listening in surround sound
You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in
surround sound. Surround sound is generated from
stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic
decoding modes.
RCS-404H/RCS-505H only: If you set up the system for
Front surround (page 7), the Front Surround modes will
give the best results (see Using Front Surround on
page 26).
MCACC
/TUNE
7
8
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
3
/ST+
TV CONTROL
MENU
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
MAIN
SUB
AXD7442
0
SLEEP
+
+
1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press
SOUND.
2 Use / to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or
PANORAMA then press ENTER.
• C WIDTH (Center Width): Provides a better blend of
the front speakers by spreading the center channel
between the front right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower
settings)
• DIMEN. (Dimension): Adjusts the depth of the
surround sound balance from front to back, making
the sound more distant (minus settings), or more
forward (positive settings)
AXD7442
25
En
03
Listening to your system
• PANORAMA: Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’
effect.
3 Use / to adjust the setting then press ENTER
to confirm.
RCS-404H/RCS-505H only: If you set up the system for
Front surround (page 7), the Front Surround modes will
give the best results (see Using Front Surround above).
7
8
9
SURROUND ADVANCED
+
+
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
The Front Surround modes are effective when you are
using the Front surround speaker setup as described on
page 7. The surround speakers should be placed beside
the front speakers and oriented either towards the walls,
or straight ahead, depending on which mode you are
using (see below).
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
SUB
MAIN
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
SUB
AXD7442
• Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced
Surround mode.
Press repeatedly to select:
• ADVMOVIE – Suitable for movies
• ADVMUSIC – Suitable for music
9
SOUND
• EXPANDED – Wide sound field
0
SLEEP
MAIN
JUKE BOX
INPUT
RCS-404H/RCS-505H only
7
TV/DVD
CLEAR
0
SLEEP
Using Front Surround
SOUND
• TV SURR. – Surround sound for mono or stereo TV
broadcasts
DISPLAY
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programming
RDS DISP
• GAME – Suitable for TV game units
AXD7442
• Press ADVANCED to select a Front Surround
mode.
Press repeatedly to select FRTMOVIE, FRTMUSIC or
EXTPOWER.
• If you have selected FRTMOVIE (Front Surround
Movie) or FRTMUSIC (Front Surround Music), turn
each surround speaker so that the guide markers on
the stand base are lined up horizontally in the
direction the listening position (see below). With
EXTPOWER (Extra Power), the surround speakers
should point in the same direction as the front
speakers (see below).
• VIRTUAL – A virtual surround effect using just the
subwoofer and front speakers.
• 5 STEREO – Powerful surround sound for stereo
music sources
Listening in stereo
You can listen to any source—stereo or multichannel—in
stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all
channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers
and the subwoofer.
MCACC
/TUNE
7
8
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC
EXTPOWER
Using Advanced Surround
The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any
multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional
surround sound effects.
26
En
SUB
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
• Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows
in the display.
• You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
Listening to your system
When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA
compression process, sound quality often suffers from
an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature
employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality
sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring
sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over
after compression.
3 Use the / buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF
then press ENTER to confirm.
• On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and
speaker settings (channel delay and channel level)
remains as it is set.
• Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically
after Auto MCACC setup is used.
English
Using the Sound Retriever
03
Enhancing dialogue
Tip
• This feature is effective when used together with the
Jukebox function of the DVD recorder.
The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make
the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in
a TV or movie sound track.
1
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
STOP
REC
STOP REC HELP
INFO
• While listening to a stereo source, press SOUND
RETRIEVER .
Press repeatedly to switch between:
• RTRV ON — Switches the Sound Retriever on.
• RTRV OFF — Switches the Sound Retriever off.
Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select DIALOGUE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the amount
dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm.
Select between OFF, MID or MAX.
Using Quiet and Midnight listening
modes
The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or
treble in a sound source.
The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear
effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.
Listening with Acoustic Calibration
EQ
You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration
EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal
surround sound on page 23.
/
/
TIMER REC REC MODE
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
SET UP
1
2
4
7
6
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
9
SLEEP
Adjusting the bass and treble
Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall
tone.
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
1
DISPLAY
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press
ENTER.
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
1
3 Use the / buttons to select QUIET or
MIDNIGHT then press ENTER to confirm.
• To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes,
select BASS/TRE.
SOUND
0
SUB
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press
ENTER.
MENU
5
SURROUND ADVANCED
MAIN
Press SOUND.
3
ENTER
MCACC
1
RDS DISP
AXD7442
Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select MCACC EQ then
press ENTER.
Press SOUND.
3 Use the / buttons to select BASS/TRE then
press ENTER.
• Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight
listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the
same time.
4 Use the / buttons to select BASS or TREBLE;
use the / buttons to adjust the sound then press
ENTER to confirm.
27
En
Listening to your system
03
Boosting the bass level
There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the
bass in a source.
1
Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select BASSMODE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the sound then
press ENTER to confirm.
Select between OFF, MUSIC or CINEMA.
28
En
Listening to the radio
04
Chapter 4
• Manual tuning: Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to
change the displayed frequency.
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
• Auto tuning: Press and hold TUNE +/– until the
frequency display starts to move, then release. The
tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to
keep searching.
• High-speed tuning: Press and hold TUNE +/– until
the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the
button held down until you reach the frequency you
want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the
manual tuning method.
Listening to the radio
The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and
lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have
to manually tune in every time you want to listen.
RECORDER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
REC
STOP REC HELP
INFO
STOP
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
HOME MENU
GUIDE
CHANNEL +
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
PAUSE
LIVE TV
RETURN
CHANNEL –
PREV
NEXT
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
/
/
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
VOLUME
ANGLE
PLAY MODE
English
Listening to the radio
Improving poor FM reception
If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the
reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by
switching to mono.
1
Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to choose FM MODE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select FM MONO then
press ENTER.
The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono
reception mode.
Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo
mode (the stereo indicator (
) lights when receiving a
stereo broadcast).
TIMER REC REC MODE
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
3
/ST+
MENU
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
Improving poor AM sound
The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM
radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched
off. Also try changing the position and direction of the
AM loop antenna.
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
DISPLAY
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
AXD7442
Changing the noise cut mode
If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying
the above, you may be able to improve it using a different
noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best.
1
1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press
repeatedly to select the FM or AM band.
The display shows the band and frequency.
Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to choose NOISECUT then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select a Noise cut mode
(1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER.
2 Tune to a frequency.
There are three tuning modes—manual, auto, and highspeed:
29
En
Listening to the radio
04
Memorizing stations
Displaying RDS information
You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always
have easy access to your favorite stations without having
to tune in manually each time.
You can display the different types of RDS information
available.2
SET UP
1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station.
For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as
necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset.
2
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
Press SETUP.
INPUT
2
Use the ST +/– buttons to select a station preset.
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO – General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or regional
culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows or
interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical
music
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
WEATHER – Weather reports
FINANCE – Stock market reports,
commerce, trading, etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public expressing
their views by phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests and
hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY – Country music
NATION M – Popular music in a
language other than English
OLDIES – Popular music from the
’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT – Documentary
3
/ST+
MENU
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
+
+
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
SUB
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
• Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
• Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
You can search the following program types:1
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
• Press RDS DISP for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
Using RDS
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
5
TV CONTROL
MAIN
Make sure the tuner function is selected.
ENTER
SLEEP
4 Use the / buttons to select the station preset
you want then press ENTER.
1
2
0
3 Use the / buttons to choose ST.MEM. then
press ENTER.
Listening to station presets
/TUNE+
• Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
• SEARCH – PTY search (see below)
• Current tuner frequency
Searching for RDS programs
You can search for a program type listed above.
1
Press the FM/AM button for the FM band.3
2 Press RDS DISP repeatedly until SEARCH appears in
the display.
3 Use the / buttons to select the program type
you want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to start the search.
The system searches the station presets for a match. If it
finds one, searching stops for 5 sec.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER within the 5 seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, TEST, ALARM, and NO TYPE. ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements. You can’t
search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
2 • If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the PS data
display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
30
En
Surround sound settings
05
Chapter 5
1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a
source.
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
2
English
Surround sound settings
Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CH LEVEL, then
press ENTER.
Using the Setup menu
From the Setup menu you can access all the surround
sound settings of the system1, including channel levels,
speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual
mono audio playback.
4 Use / to select a channel; / to adjust the
level of that channel.
• You can adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.
• If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo
source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able
to adjust the center or surround channels.
Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu.
/
/
5
TIMER REC REC MODE
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
SETUP
1
2
3
ENTER
4
7
MENU
5
6
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
MCACC
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
Press ENTER when you’re finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
Speaker distance setting
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the speaker distance
settings you can improve the surround sound in your
listening room.
Set the distance of each speaker from your normal
listening position.
1
Channel level setting
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 23) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can
improve the surround sound in your listening room.
2 Use the / buttons to select DISTANCE, then
press ENTER.
3 Use / to select a speaker; / to adjust the
distance.
Adjust the following speakers:
This method of setting the channel levels allows you to
listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback
channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo
playback are independent of the settings for surround
sound playback.
A further method of setting the channel levels is to use
the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels
using the test tone on page 32 for more on this.
Press SETUP.
• L – Front left speaker
• C – Center speaker
• R – Front right speaker
• SR – Surround right speaker
• SL – Surround left speaker
• SW – Subwoofer
Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m.
4
Press ENTER when you’re finished.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 29 and Additional information on page 37.
31
En
Surround sound settings
05
Dynamic Range Control1
When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low
volume, low level sounds—including some of the
dialog—can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the
Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by
bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high
level peaks.
Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital
soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.
1
Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DRC, then press
ENTER.
3 Use / to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
Adjusting the channel levels using
the test tone
If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test
tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see
Channel level setting on page 31). A test tone is played
through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the
level as it plays.
Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources
are independent of the settings for surround sound
sources.
/
/
TIMER REC REC MODE
/TUNE+
1
2
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
3
ENTER
• DRC OFF (default) – No dynamic range adjustment
(use when listening at higher volume)
• DRC MID – Mid setting
• DRC HIGH – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds
are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are
increased)
4
Press ENTER to exit.
4
MCACC
7
5
MENU
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE VIDEO IN
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
Dual mono setting2
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS
soundtracks should be played. You can also use this
setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs
recorded with bilingual audio.
1
Press SETUP.
1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening
mode.
• If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two
channel) playback, select the STEREO listening
mode.
2 Use the / buttons to select DUALMONO,
then press ENTER.
2 Press TEST TONE.
The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.
3 Use / to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
3 While a test tone is playing, use the / buttons
to adjust that channel level.
The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test
tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can
adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.
• CH1 MONO (default) – Only channel 1 is played
• CH2 MONO – Only channel 2 is played
• CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the
front speakers
4
Press ENTER to exit.
• You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output
using the VOLUME +/– buttons (this does not affect
the channel level settings).
• If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not
be able to adjust the center or surround channels.
• Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer
produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We
suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening
to a source. See the method described in Channel
level setting on page 31.
Note
1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Audio DRC on page 131.
2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Switching audio channels
on page 94.
32
En
Surround sound settings
English
4 When you’re done, press ENTER to exit test tone
setup.
• If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
05
33
En
06
Other connections
Chapter 6
Other connections
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cord to the wall socket.
RECORDER
RECEIVER
SOUND
HDD/DVD FM/AM AUDIO IN RETRIEVER
PAUSE
PLAY
REC
STOP REC HELP
INFO
STOP
TOP MENU
Connecting auxiliary components
This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to
connect external components, such as your MD or CD
recorder.
1 If the system isn’t already on, press RECEIVER
to switch on.
Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite
receiver, etc.) is switched on.
2 Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input
source.
ANTENNA
DVD/DVR1
MCACC CONTROL IN
SETUP MIC
FM
UNBAL 75Ω
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
L
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
ANALOG
ANALOG
DVD/DVR2
DIGITAL
L
R
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
3 If necessary, start playback of the external
source.
AC IN
DIGITAL OUT
(OPTICAL)
CD recorder, etc.
• Connect the DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL
(OPTICAL) jack on the rear panel to the optical
output of an external playback component.
These include digital components such as an MD player,
digital satellite, or a game system.
Connecting an analog audio component
You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an
analog audio component, such as a tape player. See
Using this system for TV audio on page 14 for connection
details (this explains connecting the audio output from
your TV, but any analog audio component can be
connected).
Listening to an external audio source
You can connect both analog and digital external audio
sources to this system. Digital audio sources include
digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog
sources include your TV. See also Connecting auxiliary
components above.
34
En
Connecting external antennas
For an external AM antenna, use 5–6 meters of vinylinsulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors.
Leave the loop antenna connected.
Outdoor antenna
Indoor
antenna
(vinyl-coated
wire)
5–6m
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
Other connections
06
• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this unit (through a media
receiver, if applicable) to the CONTROL OUT jack of
your plasma display.3
Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to
make a few settings in the unit—see SR+ Setup for
Pioneer plasma displays below.
English
For an external FM antenna, Use a PAL connector to hook
up an external FM antenna.
ANTENNA
PAL connector
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR+ cable.
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma
display
/
/
TIMER REC REC MODE
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
SET UP
1
If you have a Pioneer plasma display1, you can use an
SR+ cable2 to connect it to this unit and take advantage
of various convenient features, such as controlling this
unit via the plasma display’s remote sensor, automatic
video input switching of the plasma display, display unit
messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and
automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
2
3
ENTER
4
6
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
MCACC
7
MENU
5
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
SLEEP
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
Media receiver
1
CONTROL
OUT
Pioneer plasma display
ANTENNA
MCACC CONTROL IN
SETUP MIC
FM
UNBAL 75Ω
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL
SPEAKERS
OUT
SUB WOOFER R SURROUND
L
AUDIO INPUT
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR 1 DVD/DVR 2 DIGITAL
(COAXIAL) (OPTICAL) (OPTICAL)
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
Press SR+.
2 Use the / buttons to choose SETUP, then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to choose the setting you
want to adjust.
The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle
through the display. See below for a full list and
description of each.
ANALOG
L
4
Use the / buttons to adjust the setting.
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings.
R
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
AC IN
6 When you’re done, press ENTER to leave the SR+
setup menu.
Important
• With an SR+ cable connected, the remote must now
be pointed towards your plasma display rather than
the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to
control the receiver subwoofer.
Note
1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable.
3 You won’t be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma
display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isn’t switched off.
35
En
06
Other connections
Automatic plasma display volume muting
When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the
plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver
subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwoofer
function is changed to one that you would want to hear
the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than the
plasma display (DVD, for example).
• VOL.C ON – When this unit is switched on, or the
input function is changed, the volume on the plasma
display is muted so only sound from this unit is
heard.
• VOL.C OFF – This unit does not control the volume of
the plasma display
Automatic plasma display input switching
In order that the plasma display can switch automatically
to the correct input when you switch the input function of
the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your
system is connected.
For example, if you connected your DVD recorder to the
DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 on
your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here so
that when you switch the input function of the receiver
subwoofer to DV1 to watch your DVD recorder, the
plasma display will automatically switch to input 2.
For each receiver subwoofer input function (DV1 (DVD/
DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA
(ANALOG)) you can select:
• NONE – does not switch the plasma display input
• PDP1 to PDP5 – switches the plasma display input to
one of the numbered inputs (1 to 5)
• TVTN – switches the plasma display to its built-in
TV tuner
Note
• The number of video inputs available will depend on
the plasma display you’ve connected.
• The PDP5 input may be called ‘PC Input’ (or similar)
on your plasma display.
• The SR+ setting remains in effect even in standby.
• The SR+ setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner
function.
36
En
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma
display
1
2
Press SR+ on the remote.
Use / to select SR+ ON then press ENTER.
• The SR+ setting is maintained even after switching
the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on.
Automatic muting and automatic input switching
will be effective when the receiver subwoofer is
switched on.
• If you disconnect the SR+ cable or switch the plasma
display off while SR+ is on, the SR+ ON setting
remains.
• To switch to SR+ OFF, follow steps 1 and 2, selecting
SR+ OFF.
Note
• You can control this unit with the plasma display’s
remote sensor even in standby, but you can’t control
this unit with either this unit’s remote sensor or the
plasma display’s remote sensor when the plasma
display is switched off (AC off) and the SR+ cable is
connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit.
Additional information
07
Chapter 7
• DTS-CD – Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but
note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be
skipped.
Important
• To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
/
/
TIMER REC REC MODE
SR+ ONE TOUCH COPY
SETUP
1
2
MENU
5
SURROUND ADVANCED
6
8
SURROUND ADVANCED
SLEEP
9
SOUND
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
INPUT
0
+
+
INPUT
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
TV CONTROL
MAIN
SUB
TV/DVD
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
AXD7442
MAIN
2 Use the / buttons to select DIMMER then
press ENTER.
If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change
this setting to hear the decoded signal.
1
Switch the system into standby.
2
Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CD TYPE from the
menu, then press ENTER.
CHANNEL
VOLUME
–
–
SUB
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
AXD7442
1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option.
Choose between the following options:
• SLP ON – Switches off after about an hour
• SLP OFF – Cancels the sleep timer
After selecting SLP ON, you can press SLEEP again to
check how much time is left. Each line indicates
approximately 12 minutes (remaining):
SLP - - - - -
3 Use the / buttons to select LIGHT or DARK
then press ENTER.
DTS CD setting
+
The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after
a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying
about it.2
You can choose to dim the display if you find it too
bright.1
Press SETUP.
+
TV CONTROL
DISPLAY
RDS DISP
Dimming the display
1
SOUND
0
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
MCACC
7
Setting the sleep timer
3
ENTER
4
English
Additional information
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the
factory default.
1
Switch the system on.
2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the
STANDBY/ON button on the display unit.
The next time you switch on, all the system settings
should be reset.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then
press ENTER.
Select from:
• NORMAL – Use for playback of regular audio CDs.
Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when
played.
Note
1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.
2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.
37
En
07
Additional information
Don’t...
Installation and maintenance
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come,
so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a location:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or
stereo rack.
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity,
including near radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the system will
be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in
your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may experience
interference—especially if the television uses an indoor
antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be
exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may
prevent proper cooling of the system unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough
to support all four of the system unit’s feet.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
• If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from
the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
• If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-640H-AV/DVR-440H-AV DVD recorder, try setting the
recorder’s audio-related settings back to their defaults—see The Initial Setup menu on page 128.
General
38
En
Problem
Remedy
The power does not turn on, or
switches off suddenly (an error
message may be displayed at
startup).
• Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.
• Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the
system to shut off automatically.
• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.
• Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer.
• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.
• Try reducing the volume level.
• If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
No sound is output when a
function is selected.
• If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, make sure that the digital coaxial cable is
connected properly. Also make sure that the DVD recorder’s Digital Out and DTS Out
settings are set to On, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to MPEG PCM.
• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see
Connecting auxiliary components on page 34).
• Turn up the volume.
No sound from surround or
center speakers.
• Refer to Channel level setting on page 31 to check the speaker levels.
• Check that you haven’t selected the AUTO, STEREO, or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in
surround sound on page 25).
• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up).
• If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to
Dolby Digital.
• If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround
sound, set the DVD recorder’s 96 kHz PCM Out setting to 96 kHz 48 kHz.
Additional information
Problem
07
Remedy
English
Can’t operate using the remote • Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 17).
control.
• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (Using the remote control on page 17).
• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.
• For operating the DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable are
connected. (page 10)
• If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable,
check that the plasma display is switched on. Point the remote control at the plasma
display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer.
• Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack.
Tuner
Problem
Remedy
Considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
• Connect the AM antenna (refer to the Connecting up) and adjust the direction and
position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM
antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 34).
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You
may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 34).
• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.
Auto tuning does not pick up
some stations.
• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal.
For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.
Error Messages
Message
Description
2CH ONLY
• An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the
current source is a multichannel source.
96K
• An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital.
EXIT
• Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.
NOISY
• Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.
ERR MIC
• An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is
not connected properly.
ERR SP
• An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are
not connected properly.
EEP ERROR
• Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
NO SPTYP
• Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer.
39
En
07
Additional information
Glossary
Dolby Digital
Dolby
Pro Logic II
DTS
Specifications
A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far
more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM
encoding.
A matrix decoding technology developed by
Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel
source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to
a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left
surround/right surround), resulting in a surround
experience.
A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Digital Theater Systems that
enables far more audio to be stored on a disc
than PCM encoding.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
SX-SW606 / SX-SW404
•
Amplifier section
RMS Power Output:
Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω)
Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω)
•
FM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω, unbalanced
•
AM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
•
Subwoofer section
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz
Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
•
Miscellaneous
Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W
Dimensions . . . . . 200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 437 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg
•
Accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2
Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
40
En
Additional information
07
S-ST606 Speaker system
•
(Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker
x1)
Speaker cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Speaker stands (for surround speakers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Screws (for stands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Front/surround speakers
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box floorstanding type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-way system
Speakers:
Woofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type x 2
Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.6 cm semi-dome type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . 260 mm (W) x 1095 mm (H) x 260 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 kg
•
English
•
Accessories
Note
• Specifications and design subject to possible
modification without notice, due to improvements.
Center speaker
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . . . . 270 mm (W) x 96 mm (H) x 90 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.78 kg
•
Accessories
Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Non-skid pads (small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Speaker stand bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Screws (for bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
S-ST404 Speaker system
(Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker
x1)
•
Front/surround speakers
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . . . 100 mm (W) x 136 mm (H) x 80 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 kg
•
Center speaker
Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ω
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . . . . 270 mm (W) x 96 mm (H) x 90 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.78 kg
41
En
DVD RECORDER
DVR-640H-AV
DVR-440H-AV
42
En
Section Three
01 Before you start
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 45
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Symbols used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . 84
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
07 Playback
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Easy connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using other types of audio/video output. . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting an external decoder box (1). . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting an external decoder box (2). . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the
contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Playing in slow motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Displaying disc information on-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 95
03 Controls and displays
08 Editing
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
04 Getting started
09 Copying and backup
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system. . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
02 Connecting up
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
GUIDE Plus+™ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 73
06 Recording
About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . . 77
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) . 82
Recording from an external component. . . . . . . . . . . 82
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
English
Contents
10 Using the Jukebox
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Copying files from a USB device to the HDD . . . . . . 113
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Editing Jukebox albums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
11 The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Importing files from a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . 118
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12 The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV)
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
43
En
Section Three
13 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
14 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . .126
15 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Selecting other languages for language options. . . .135
16 Additional information
Setting up the remote to control your TV. . . . . . . . . .136
TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
On-screen displays and recorder displays. . . . . . . . .143
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
44
En
Before you start
01
Chapter 1
English
Before you start
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we
recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
Compatible media
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’
limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1/1 x / 1 x to 2 x, ver. 1.2 / 2 x to 4 x / 2
x to 6 x
Model
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1 x / 1 x to 4 x /
1 x to 8 x / 1 x to 16 x, ver. 2.1 / 1 x to 8 x / 1 x to 16 x
Playable
1,2,3
DVR-7000
• DVD+RW 1 x to 2.4 x / 1 x to 4 x / 3.3 x to 8 x
Yes
Yes1
DVR-3100 /
DVR-5100H
• DVD+R 1 x to 2.4 x / 1 x to 4 x / 1 x to 8 x / 1 x to 16 x
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2 x, ver. 2.1 / 2 x / 2 x to 3 x / 2 x to
5 x, ver. 2.2 / 2 x / 2 x to 3 x / 2 x to 5 x
Recordable
No
No
1
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2
Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2 x to 4 x
• DVD+R DL 2.4 x / 2.4 x to 8 x
DVD/HDD Recording and playback
compatibility
This recorder can play and record all the currently
popular DVD disc types, as well as providing HDD
functionality. The table below shows some specific
compatibility differences between the different disc
types.
HDD
Marks used in this manual
HDD
DVD-R
DVD (VR)
DVD-RW
DVD (Video)
*1
DVD (VR)
DVD (Video)
*1
*2
DVD+R
DVD
+RW
DVD-RAM
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
*13, 16
Logos
Re-recordable / Erasable
*3
*3
*3
*14
Editing of recorded programs
*4
*4
*4
*4
Recording of Copy-once protected
material
*12
Playback in other players/recorders
n/a
*5
Chase play
16:9 and 4:3 program recording
Bilingual broadcast recording of
both audio channels
*10, 11
*12
*6
*7
*12
*6
*6, 15
*8
*9
*11
*11
*11
45
En
01
Before you start
Notes to table
About DualDisc playback
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 123)
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 123)
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units)
(page 84)
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off
(page 133)
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Matsushita and
Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs
from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor
increase the number of recordable titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be
recorded (page 123). In this case, initialization will take about 1 hour.
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which
contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other
side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD-R DL (dual-layer) and DVD+R DL (double-layer)
discs contain two recordable layers on a single side,
giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to
both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or
DVD+R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD
recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that
some DVD recorders/players may not play even
finalized DL discs.)
• Please read the information provided on the disc
packaging carefully before purchasing DVD-R DL/
DVD+R DL discs:
• Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 /
2 x to 4 x DVD-R discs.
• Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R should be
compatible with 2 x or 4 x recording; DVD+R with 2.4
x to 8 x recording.
• This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc:
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with
the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc,
the opposite side to that being played will be scratched.
Scratched discs may not be playable.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVDAudio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the DualDisc
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or
disc retailer.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a
wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable
discs will generally feature one of the following logos on
the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some
disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in
an unplayable format—see below for further
compatibility information.
Audio CD
Video CD
CD-R
CD-RW
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
CD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or
DivX files.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
• Correct operation has been confirmed for DVD-R DL
discs (ver. 3.0 / 2 x, 4 x) produced by the following
manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku Media, Verbatim
(as of March 2005).
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R,
CD-RW, DVR-640H-AV only: USB
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or
48 kHz
• Bit-rates: Any (128 Kbps or higher recommended)
46
En
Before you start
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)1 file playback: No
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6)
with standard playback of DivX® media files.
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that
all files with the .avi extension are recognized as
MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video
files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.
English
• VBR WMA playback: No
01
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
DivX® VOD content
DivX
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
The Windows Media® logo printed on the box indicates
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
using Windows Media® Player for Windows® XP,
Windows Media® Player 9 or Windows Media® Player 10
series.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
DivX video compatibility
DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the
DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play
DivX video files burned on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping
the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX
video files are called "Titles." When naming files/titles on
a CD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by
default they will be played in alphabetical order.
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on
this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with
your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by
generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed
number of times. When you load a disc containing this
type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays
is shown on-screen and you then have the option of
playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining
plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains
expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is
displayed.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of
plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and
play the content as often as you like, and no message will
be displayed.
Important
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital
Rights Management) system. This restricts playback
of content to specific, registered devices.
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not
authorized for this recorder, the message
Authorization Error is displayed and the content
will not play.
• Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the
recorder on page 148) will not cause you to lose your
registration code.
• Official DivX® Certified product.
Note
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of
compressed audio files on devices other the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
47
En
01
Before you start
JPEG file compatibility
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used
for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use
for other file types)
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application
software used to create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
Dolby Digital
About the internal hard disk drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it
is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the
recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or
that normal playback and recording will not be possible.
Please understand that in the event of repair or
replacement of the HDD or related components, all your
HDD recordings will be lost.
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to
protect against possible HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up
your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to
protect against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept
responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from
HDD failure.
• Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
• While the recorder is switched on (including during
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity
off from the breaker switch.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
• Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
DTS
3 Move the recorder.
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
48
En
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.
Before you start
01
Optimizing HDD performance
English
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD on page 124).
Symbols used in this manual
The following icons are provided to help you quickly
identify which instructions you need for which kind of
disc.
HDD
HDD
DVD
Any type of DVD disc
(recordable or playback
only), finalized or not.
DVD-Video
Commercially produced
DVD, finalized Video mode
DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)
Video mode DVD-R/-RW
(unfinalized)
DVD (VR)
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
DVD-RAM
CD
Audio CD
Video CD
Video CD
Super VCD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
WMA or MP3 files
DivX
DivX files
ALL
All of the above
49
En
Connecting up
02
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1
2
3
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
4
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
L
R
OUT
PR
5
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
6
7
8
9
1 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 129 for how
to set this up.
AUDIO
VIDEO
ANTENNA
S-VIDEO
Front panel connections
On the front panel a flip-down cover hides more
connections.
2 OUTPUT
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
3 AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 130 for how to set this up.
4 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
5
AC IN – Power inlet
6 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect to the DVD/DVR1 coaxial jack on the receiver
subwoofer.
7 CONTROL IN
Connect to the CONTROL OUT terminal of the receiver
subwoofer.
8 G-LINK™
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable
GUIDE Plus+™ to control an external satellite receiver,
etc.
9 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or
monitor with a component video input.
50
En
OPEN/CLOSE
DV IN
USB
10
HDD/DVD
11
12
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
(MONO)
INPUT
13
10 USB port (type B) (DVR-640H-AV only)
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer.
11 USB port (type A) (DVR-640H-AV only)
USB port for connecting a digital camera, USB memory
or other USB device.
12 DV IN (DVR-640H-AV only)
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a
DV camcorder.
13 INPUT 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and Svideo video), especially suitable for camcorders, game
consoles, portable audio, etc.
Connecting up
02
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows
you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs.
Other types of connections are explained starting on the
following page.
Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied).
If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART
connection, see the following page for connecting up
using the supplied audio/video cable.
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary
(composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo
analog audio. The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video
input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on
page 129 and AV2/L1 In on page 130 for how to set
them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel
connections, make sure that all components are
switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
ANTENNA
IN
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
English
Easy connections
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
it to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on this recorder
and skip the next step.
2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN) of this recorder.
3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
5 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 128).
4
TV
3
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
R
L
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
ANTENNA
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
5
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
VCR
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
51
En
02
Connecting up
Using other types of audio/video
output
Connecting to a cable box, satellite
receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your
TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.
If you have a cable, satellite or digital terrestrial receiver
with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and
your TV as shown on the following page.1 If you are using
a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up
following the instructions on the next page.
Using the S-video or component video
output
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box,
satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
S-VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
1
2
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Change channels and set timer recordings on the
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system
(via the
G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
TV
Important
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
L
R
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
1 Connect the S-video or component video output
to a similar input on your TV.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not
supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an Svideo input on your TV.
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or other component.
Always connect each component directly to your TV
or AV amplifier/receiver.
• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a
timer recording from an external receiver, make sure
that the external receiver is switched on.
For a component video connection, use a component
video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.
See also Component Video Out on page 129 for how to set
up the component video output for use with a progressive
scan-compatible TV.
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
ANTENNA
IN
TV
1
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
L
R
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
ANTENNA
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
4
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
OUT
3
Cable/Satellite/
Digital Terrestrial
receiver
1
ANTENNA
IN
1
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.
52
En
Connecting up
02
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™
jack.
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver will pick up the control signals (see
diagram).
Connecting an external decoder box
(1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your
satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on
this page. See the previous page for how to connect the
G-LINK™ cable.
English
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this
recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating
to pay TV services), is only viewable when this
recorder is off (in standby).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder,
the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be
switched on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record
another using this setup.
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
Y
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
OUTPUT
L
R
PR
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
G-LINK cable
4
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite/
digital terrestrial receiver if you’re not sure where the IR
receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment
with the remote control, operating it from very close
range until you find the place where the receiver
responds.
TV
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
R
L
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
IN
G-LINK
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 128).
3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
Decoder
ANTENNA
IN
1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
53
En
02
Connecting up
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector to your TV.
Connecting an external decoder box
(2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and
your TV as shown on this page.1
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record scrambled channels received using the
recorder’s built-in TV tuner.
Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR,
satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each
component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/
receiver.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
2
TV
1
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
Y
AC IN
PB
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
IN
OUTPUT
R
L
OUT
PR
COAXIAL
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
G-LINK
AUDIO
VIDEO
ANTENNA
S-VIDEO
ANTENNA
OUT
3
1
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Decoder
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 130).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 129).
54
En
Connecting up
02
Connecting a DV camcorder
DVR-640H-AV only
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is possible to connect
a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder
and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to
DVD-R/RW.
OPEN/CLOSE
English
Connecting other AV sources
HDD/DVD
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
(Rear panel)
– CH +
ONE
TOUCH
COPY
STOP
REC
REC
Important
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
(Front panel)
1
2
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or DVHS video decks.
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
STANDBY/ON
Analog camcorder
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
DVR-640H-AV
– CH +
ONE
TOUCH
COPY
REC
STOP
REC
DV
IN
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
DV
OUT
VCR
1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
DV camcorder
1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.
Connecting a USB device
DVR-640H-AV only
Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can
connect USB devices such as digital cameras and
printers . Please also see the instructions that came with
the device you want to connect before using.
OPEN/CLOSE
HDD/DVD
STANDBY/ON
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder input.
– CH +
ONE
TOUCH
COPY
STOP
REC
REC
DVR-640H-AV
USB
Type B
USB
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
USB
Type A
USB
Digital Camera
Important
• Devices may not work reliably if connected to this
recorder via a USB hub.
55
En
02
Connecting up
JPEG file storage devices
• Digital still camera
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to
transfer up to about 4000 files.
WMA/MP3 file storage devices
• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
• USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FATcompatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used,
the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To
read another card, remove all the cards and insert the
card to be read again.
Using a USB printer
• Use a PictBridge-comaptible printer.
Plugging in
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.
1 Use the supplied power cable to connect this
recorder to a power outlet.
56
En
Controls and displays
03
Chapter 3
English
Controls and displays
Front panel
2
1
3
4
5
OPEN/CLOSE
7
6
8
HDD/DVD
STANDBY/ON
USB
DV IN
DVR-640H-AV
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
2
Disc tray
3 OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
S-VIDEO
9
– CH +
ONE
TOUCH
COPY
STOP
REC
REC
VIDEO
L AUDIO R
(MONO)
INPUT
10 11 12 13 14
13 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 106)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
14 STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
4 HDD / DVD indicators
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is
selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected.
5 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 79)
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.
6 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and
playback.
7 Front panel display
See Display on page 58 for details.
8 REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in 30 minute blocks.
9 Front panel inputs
See Front panel connections on page 50 for more
information on these.
10 Press to start or restart playback.
11 Press to stop playback.
12 CH +/–
Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
57
En
Controls and displays
03
Display
1
2 3
4
L R
8
7
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
2 Lights when copying.
6
3 Lights during recording; blinks when recording is
paused.
7 R / RW
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is
loaded.
4
8
(page 79)
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
NTSC
Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.
(page 130)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
(page 129)
Lights when the component video output is set to
progressive scan.
VPS / PDC (page 79)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
5
Recording quality indicators (page 77)
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best
quality).
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
LP / SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play) or SLP (super-long play).
EP / SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play) or SEP (super-extended play).
En
P
6
1 Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
58
5
Character display
PL (page 97)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the
recorder is in Play List mode.
2 3 (page 134)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is
loaded.
Getting started
04
Chapter 4
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.
English
Getting started
ENTER
5
Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto
Scan’ or ‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’.
k Setting
Auto Channel Setting
Line System
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
er Save
English
Auto
Scan
P
Download from TV
p Navigator Do not Set
• Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup
(because they have already been set up, for example).
1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
this recorder is connected to your TV using a fullywired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1(RGB)-TV
connector, and if your TV supports this function
(check your TV’s instruction manual for more
details).
RECORDER
2
Switch on the recorder.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 128).
ENTER
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
ENTER
3
Choose a language (then press ENTER).
•
Select your country.
k Setting
Country Selection
t Line System
er Save
Country
Austria
P
• Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
Tuning
Initial Setup
Basic
Language
Clock Setting
Tuner
Input Line System
Video In/ O ut
Pow er Save
Audio In
Help
Audio O ut
Setup N avig ator
Language
Re cording
Playback
32/99
Cancel
• Downloading channels from your TV
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
Downloading
4
ENTER
Pr 5
Start the Setup Navigator.
32/99
Cancel
k Setting
t Line Complete
System this setup before you
start using your recorder.
er Save
Start
P
p Navigator Cancel
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting,
or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually.
k Setting
Clock Setting
Line System
er Save
Auto
P
Manual
59
En
Getting started
04
•
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
Use the / buttons to move from one field to
another.
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.
ENTER
7
Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or
‘Standard (4:3)’.
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
–– / –– / ––––
k Setting
TV Screen Size
Line System
–– : ––
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
Pr 1
S t ar t
k Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Standard (4:3)
ENTER
8
Select whether or not your TV is
compatible with progressive scan video.
SUN 01 / 01 / 2006
k Setting
Progressive
11 : 20
p Navigator
Clock Set CH
Line System
Pr 1
er Save
Compatible
S t ar t
P
Not Compatible
N ext
p Navigator Don't Know
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual.
•
Wide (16:9)
P
p Navigator
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed.
Line System
Date
er Save
Time
P
er Save
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
• Note that progressive scan video is only output
through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the
component video outputs.
9 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD
caution.
Use the / buttons to set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
k Setting
In the event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
Line
not System
be possible.
er Save
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD
P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
p Navigator
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
Press ENTER to continue.
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
Austria
Vienna
P
p Navigator
Summer Time
Off
ENTER
Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
10
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup
Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
k Setting
S etup i s compl ete!
Line System
er SaveEnj oy usi ng your DV D r ecor der !
1/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
p Navigator
Summer Time
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
On
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
2/2
k Setting
Manual Clock Setting
P
Time
p Navigator
SUN 01 / 01 / 2006
00 : 00
Time Zone
Austria
Vienna
Summer Time
On
Use the / buttons to change the value in the
highlighted field.
60
En
Go B ack
Austria
Vienna
P
Line
System
Date
er Save
Fi ni sh S etup
p Navigator
Line System
Time Zone
er Save
• If there are blank channels with no station, you can
set these to skip using the manual channel setting.
See Manual CH Setting on page 129.
Getting started
04
SET UP
1
/ST–
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
MCACC
3
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
ADVANCED
0
9
ENTER
Enter your postal code.
English
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system
4
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is
important that you set the language and country
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see
Switching on and setting up on page 59).
TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
1
GUIDE
Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
ENTER
2
Highlight ‘Postal Code’.
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
• See Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver on page 52 for more on using
the supplied G-LINK cable.
• Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in
2 and 3 if you need to.)
After pressing ENTER:
• Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or
Satellite).
• Select your provider (if applicable).
• Select the brand of your external receiver.
• Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.
61
En
04
Getting started
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby;
it will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host
channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
C If you use both an external receiver and this
recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for
setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is
unsuccessful try the external receiver method.
About EPG download
• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
• Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to
reach the Setup area and select Setup.
• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the GLINK controller, please call customer support and report
the brand and model of your external receiver.
• If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on
page 73.
5 Identify the host channel for your country.
The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+
system is distributed throughout Europe by selected
broadcasters called host channels. It is important that
the host channel for your country is correctly identified in
order to receive listings information (EPG download).
• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set ShowView timer recordings and
manual recordings — see Setting a timer recording on
page 79.
• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is canceled.
Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup:
A If you are not using an external receiver, this
recorder will automatically scan all channels for the
host channel:
• EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
• Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave
it switched on).
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the host channel from the table below:
Country/
Region
Host
channels
Austria
Eurosport
Belgium
RTL-TVI
TMF will be switched off in the near
Music Factory future.
(TMF)
France
Canal+
Germany
Eurosport
Italy
Sport Italia
Comments
1
Analog only
Analog only
Netherlands Music Factory TMF will be switched off in the near
(TMF),
future.
Eurosport
62
En
Spain
Tele 5
Switzerland
Eurosport
UK
ITV, Eurosport
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
Analog only
ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport if
you are a SKY subscriber and you no
longer have a terrestrial antenna.
GUIDE
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Getting started
• Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.
English
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the / buttons to review the
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the
Editor screen:
04
• Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that
are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that
are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to
move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as
necessary.
• For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which program number. The source
may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an
external receiver. The program number is the number
on which the channel can be found on its receiving
device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must
match this number for correct recording of that
channel.
• The above is especially important for the ‘host
channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is
always switched ON.
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
2
Change the program numbers as you
0
like.
Changing the program numbers allows you to decide the
order in which the channels change when stepping
through them sequentially. You can do this to group
certain channels together, for example.
ADVANCED
3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the following chapter.
63
En
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
Chapter 5
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system
™
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide.1 The system
provides program listings for all major channels, onetouch recording, searching by genre, recommendations
according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+
system is a convenient way to find out what's on right
now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre.
The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to
automatically set your viewing and recording selections
quickly and easily.
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 61 before
proceeding.
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
All the various features and areas are colour-coded for
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of
some setup screens) have the following common
elements:
3
1
5
2
1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current program while using the GUIDE Plus+
system.
Legal Notice
2 Information panels – Display program promotions
or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
3 Action bar – colour-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
4 Information box – Shows short program
descriptions or help menus.
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 128).
En
6
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+,
G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2)
manufactured under license from and (3) subject of
various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International,
Inc. and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
64
4
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
GUIDE Plus+ navigation
Key
What it does
REC
Press to set or cancel One Button
Recording.
GUIDE
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+
screen (also use to exit).
///
Use to navigate screens (highlight
an item).
RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE
Action buttons that change
functionality depending on the Area.
MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu
bar.
ENTER
1
Highlight a program title.
2 Press the RED Action button (Record).
The program is now set for recording. When the program
is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct
channel and start recording1.
TIMER REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule
area.
INFO
Press to display extended
information for the current program.
• You can also use the REC button to set the
recording.
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection or to
leave the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
• You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on
page 68).
Number buttons
Use for numeric entry.
/
Press to select the previous/next
page of information (in the grid, for
example).
/
Press to select the previous/next
day.
One-Button-Record
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a program title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
The program name, date, channel, recording start and
end times are all set automatically when you set a timer
recording using One-Button-Record.
English
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Lock / Unlock video window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that
channel is shown in the video window.
ENTER
If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before
the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled
recording on page 69).
1
Highlight a channel logo.
Note
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the program broadcast schedules.
65
En
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles.
The Grid Area
2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE
Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when
you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next
seven days, starting with the current day.
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as
Lock.
When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see
information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button
to see it.
Channel mosaic screen
You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid
Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic
of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a
particular program (mostly movies). These ratings are
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.
From the Grid Area you can:
• View and scroll through program listings
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing1
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+™ system consists of seven Areas. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.
Displays TV listings information for the next seven
days by time and channel.
• Set a program to record
• Lock or unlock the video window.
• Access Information panels.
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
• Search – Search for TV programs by category (e.g.,
Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword.
/// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
• My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
/
– Previous / next day
/ – Previous / next page
• Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings.
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid.
• Info – Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE
Plus+ system and start watching the program
• Editor – Change channel settings.
• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
• Search by category
• Search by subcategory
• Search by keyword
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Access Information panels.
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel.
This is normal.
66
En
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
Using My Choice keywords for a search
You can search for programs by category, subcategory or
by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching
include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue)
and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further
subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are
programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV
magazine.
In addition to the standard categories, you can also set
your own keywords.
ENTER
1
English
Searching
05
Access My Choice.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
ENTER
2
Select a category and a subcategory.
2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a
keyword.
ENTER
3
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programs in
the category you selected will show up in the search
results.
3 ENTER Start the search.
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
• If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programs for the current day that match your
search criteria.
When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to
exit and continue.
4
Start the keyword search.
• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
ENTER
• When you have set more than two keywords, an All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
67
En
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile.
You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or
keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set, the
GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings
for the next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV
Area, a list of programs matching your profile appears.
4 To add a theme to your profile, highlight
‘Themes’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
From the My TV Area you can:
• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword.
• Edit and delete profiles.
• Read program synopsis
• Tune to a program that’s currently showing
• Set a program to record
• Access Information panels.
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.
1
Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
2
Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
Channels is now highlighted.
3 To add a channel to your profile, press the
YELLOW Action button.
Select a theme from the Search Area categories and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four
categories.
5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
6
Press ENTER to activate your profile.
• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings. (See also Setting a
timer recording on page 79 for further timer recording
features.)
From the Schedule Area you can:
• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
• Set, edit or delete a ShowView recording.
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
68
En
• Set, edit or delete a manual recording.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
Editing a scheduled recording
4
Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
English
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it.
1
05
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
• If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip
to step 6 below.
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action
button to continue.
5
Highlight the right recording tile.
6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the
recording date, start time, end time and channel.
Select from AUTO1, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or MN (if
manual recording is set to On.)
Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons or the number
buttons to edit.
7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
change the recording frequency.
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the
RED Action button to go back.
Note
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
69
En
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1
Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
select the recording destination.
2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace
Recording)1.
• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an
option with regular daily or weekly recordings.
Setting a ShowView™ recording
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
9 Press (cursor right) to access the extended
recording options:
• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use
the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.
• Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or
VPS/PDC2 (V–P)).
• Press (cursor left) to display the standard
recording options again.
Note
1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 132) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
70
En
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
2
Press the RED Action button (ShowView).
5 Enter the recording end time in the same way,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
English
3 Use the number buttons to enter a ShowView
programming number.
4 In the same way, enter the recording start time,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
05
6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
• If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE
Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel
number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.
4
Press ENTER to confirm.
Setting a manual recording
1
Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button
(Mosaic) and use the /// buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.
The Info Area
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
The Editor Area
2
Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
3 Use the number and /// buttons to enter
the recording date, then press the GREEN Action
button (Next).
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
From the Editor Area you can:
• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off).
• Select a channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec. 1, Ext.
Rec. 2, etc.).
• Enter a channel program number.
71
En
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
Switching a channel on/off
The Setup Area
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+
system for your particular region, TV reception
conditions, and so on.
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1
Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.
Basic Setup
Host Channel Setup
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
3 Press the RED Action button to switch the
channel on or off.
2
Highlight the part you want to change.
Changing the source and program number
1
Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code1
and the External Receiver settings.
3
Press ENTER to confirm.
2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
you want to make a change to.
3 Press the RED Action button to change the
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a program number.
Each press of the RED Action button changes the
channel source (Tuner, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a
program number, use the number buttons to enter a
program number then press ENTER. (When set to Tuner,
make sure that the program number matches the preset
number of this recorder for what you want to record).
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
72
En
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
Manual Host Channel setup
If you know your Host Channel details (source and
program number) or if the automatic identification did
not provide the expected result, you can identify your
Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in
the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV.
Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external
receiver) and enter the respective program number (e.g.,
if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host
Channel, enter 9 as the program number). When you next
switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus+
system will complete the Host Channel setup.
You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back
to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that
resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
FAQ
• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
A: There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a
cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
on page 52.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE
Plus+ system can change channels on your external
receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process,
choosing different reception and external receiver
combinations until you have tried all the codes for
your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE
Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on
how to receive new codes overnight.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local host channel and leave
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
English
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your
Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby
for the first time. See the table on page 62 for a list of all
the European Host Channels.
05
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
• My external receiver was successfully setup. However
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has
to change to a channel with a 3-digit program number
in the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It
looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only send two
digits.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent
a different code). Try all the different codes until your
GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external
receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to
receive new codes overnight.
• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
You can try to receive your host channel through your
new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
host channel correctly in the Editor Area.
• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the lineup for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
73
En
05
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
– Connections are wrong. See Connecting up on
page 50 to double check everything.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 61).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+™ system on page 61) and leave the recorder
in standby and the external receiver on overnight
tuned to the correct host channel.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor
Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and program number of the channel that you
wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the Tuner setting), make sure that the program
number is the same as the preset number set on this
recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area
and change the program number to match the
recorder’s preset number.
• The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the
download will be canceled.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area,
but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a
while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop
this from happening?
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your
area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™
system on page 61). When the GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, please set the postal code again.
74
En
• The automatic Host Channel search failed or the
GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host
Channel for my region.
You can identify your Host Channel manually. See
Manual Host Channel setup on page 73 for how to do
this.
Recording
06
Chapter 6
English
Recording
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
About DVD recording
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R,
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media.
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video
mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages,
and it depends on what you want to do with the recording
which mode you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,
and changing the way the video is presented.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs1).
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all
recording on that disc will be in that mode.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode
recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the
total number of recordable titles remaining may not
increase.
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 134.
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can
affect playback and/or recording performance.
Please take proper care of your discs.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
• See also Disc / content format playback compatibility
on page 45 for detailed disc compatibility
information.
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
Important
The table below shows the maximum number of titles
recordable per disc and the maximum number of
chapters per title:
Disc type/rec.
format
Max. titles
(per disc)
Max. chapters
(per title)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99
99
DVD-R/-RW/RAM
VR mode
99
999*1
DVD+R/+RW
49
99*2
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the
same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however,
please note the following points:
• When the recorder switches from the first layer to the
second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode)
disc, a new title is automatically started on the new
layer.
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video
mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when
the layer is switched, recording will stop.
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc.
*1
• You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or
finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been
recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
*2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
• This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized Video
mode and DVD+R discs recorded on another
recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on another
recorder are playable on this recorder but are not
recordable.
Note
1.Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for
VR mode compatibility information.
75
En
06
Recording
About HDD recording
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very
flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality
options, including manual mode, and of course you can
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher
quality recording modes.
Important
• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99
respectively. No more recording is possible on the
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
• The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is 12 hours.
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 134)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 133).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from
HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW is
possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set
which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup
menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 130).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,
high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, both
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
Recorded audio
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two
channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can
be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible).
When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality,
uncompressed Linear PCM format.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
to Video mode DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD
with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting
76
En
(page 130) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to
record before recording starts. In other cases, both
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and
you can switch on playback.
Restrictions on video recording
You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause
automatically and an error message will be displayed onscreen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to
HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/RW (see
below), or DVD-RAM.
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external
input, you can display copy control information on
screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on
page 95).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs.
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable
Media.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVDR (ver. 2.0 / 8 x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher)
discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the
HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must
be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
Recording
06
Note
• When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode,
or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a
bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide
which language you want to record before recording
by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see
Bilingual Recording on page 130).
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,
recording or during recording standby.
CHANNEL +
ENTER
•
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
•
CHANNEL +/– buttons
CHANNEL –
SET UP
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
Switching between TV and DVD
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
ADVANCED
0
English
Using the built-in TV tuner
9
Number buttons
For example, to select channel 4, press 4 then
ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4, ENTER.1
• CH +/– buttons on the front panel
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
Changing audio channels
During playback or when a menu is being displayed onscreen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
AUDIO
• MAIN SUB +
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on
page 130) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
Switch between TV mode and DVD mode.
NICAM
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Regular
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
NICAM A
Regular
TV/DVD
•
NICAM B
NICAM A+B
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
A (L)
B (R)
A + B (L+R)
• When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 130), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
L
R
L+R
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance
between picture quality and recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual
Recording on page 132), a further option will be available
(MN1 to MN32 or LPCM, depending on what you set).
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest
recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to
MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to
SLP.
REC MODE
•
Press repeatedly to select the recording
quality.
• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most
applications, gives about two hours of recording time
on a DVD.
• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four
hours.
Note
1. Channel presets are numbered 1 to 99.
77
En
Recording
06
• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
3
Basic recording from the TV
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
AUDIO
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
REC
Start recording.
5
If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
• To cancel the set recording time, press REC.
Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the
channel to record, choosing whether to record to the
HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a
new chapter is started after recording restarts)
HDD/DVD
1
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the
recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video
mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before
proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on
page 85).
CHANNEL +
ENTER
2
Select a TV channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number:
Set the picture quality/recording time.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above
for detailed instructions.
4 MAIN SUB +
Select the audio channel to record.
See Changing audio channels on page 77 for more on
this.
• MN1 to MN32 / LPCM1 – Manual / Linear PCM
(available only when manual recording is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 133) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
REC MODE
STOP REC
6
Press to stop recording.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing STOP
REC.
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
CHANNEL –
Tip
Channel preset
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER)
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH +/
– buttons on the front panel to select the channel
number.
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or CH – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
though off). Loop through is automatically reset to off
after recording has finished. Note that you can’t
switch loop through on if recording from the AV2/
(INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors.
Note
1.Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 130).
78
En
Recording
06
Setting a timer recording
HDD
ALL
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV
program you’re watching. When you’re ready to resume
watching, just press the Play button.
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
To use this feature the recorder must be connected to
your TV using a SCART cable, and the AV Link setting
(page 134) should be set to This Recorder Only.
Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions
that came with your TV if you’re not sure.
Important
• Pause Live TV will not work as expected when
watching TV via an external component such as a
VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel
selected on the TV.
1
PAUSE
LIVE TV
Start recording the current TV channel.
Recording continues with playback paused.
• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording
to start.
PLAY
2
Press to start playback.
You can also use the scan buttons (/
), pause (
PAUSE) and stop ( STOP)—all without affecting the
recording.
STOP REC
3
Press to stop the recording.
Tip
• You can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder is
in standby to switch on and immediately start
recording. After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take
at least 10 seconds for the picture to change (during
this time, all controls except the power button are
inoperative).
• Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the Pause Live TV feature.
English
Pause Live TV
There are two ways to program a timer recording; using
the GUIDE Plus+ system (see The Schedule Area on
page 68) or using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see
Easy Timer Recording below).
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to HDD).
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer program will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have
watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 132 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that
a timer recording catches the whole program even when
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
Important
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programs waiting to be recorded.
• Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
• Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
79
En
06
Recording
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
the HDD is not recordable).
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
Easy Timer Recording
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.1
1
HOME MENU Select ‘Easy Timer’ from the Home
Menu.
2
PREV
NEXT
Easy Timer Recording
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
Set the TV channel to record.
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
1/01
2/01
3/01
SAT
3
• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download
program information. During these times, VPS/PDC
may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a
timer recording for these times.
9:30
1/01
Pr 7
REC MODE
– ––:––
HDD/DVD
SP
HDD
REC MODE
Set the recording quality.
• DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality for the space available on
the disc loaded at the time of recording.
• HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank
DVD disc.
HDD/DVD
4
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
ENTER
5
Move the cursor to the recording start
date and time on the grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the and buttons.
Current time
Recording start time
Easy Timer Recording
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
1/01
2/01
3/01
SAT
1/01
Pr 7
11:45
REC MODE
– ––:––
SP
HDD/DVD
HDD
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
Note
1.You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Set a scheduled recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system if you want to use VPS/PDC.
80
En
Recording
06
Stopping a timer recording
STOP REC
1
Press during a timer recording.
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need
to by pressing RETURN.
English
6 ENTER Set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
screen.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
ENTER
7
Move the cursor to the recording end
time on the grid.
Recording start time
Recording end time
Easy Timer Recording
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
16:00
17:00
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
1/01
2/01
RECORDER
3/01
SAT
1/01
Pr 7
1
11:45 – 13:45
REC MODE
SP
HDD/DVD
HDD
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
stretches from the start time to the current cursor
position, representing the length of the recording. A
recording of up to six hours can be set.
8
ENTER
Set the end time.
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds
to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly
displayed again.
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold STOP on
the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for
three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK.
ENTER
9
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and
exit, or ‘No’ to go back to the Easy Timer Recording
screen.
• You can check the timer recording details you just set
from the Schedule Area in the GUIDE Plus system;
see The Schedule Area on page 68.
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast
program overruns, for example.
Canceling or extending the timer
REC
Press and hold for three seconds during a
1
timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears
from the front panel display indicating that the timer has
been canceled.
REC
Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30
2
minute blocks.
81
En
06
Recording
PLAY
Timer recording FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 123), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
•
Press during recording to start
playback from the beginning of the current
recording1.
DISC
• NAVIGATOR Press during recording to select another
title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
• To stop playback, press STOP (recording will
continue).
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
• To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will
continue).
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 134). Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback
track/title changes then playback will automatically
stop.
• What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
Recording from an external
component
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Simultaneous recording and
playback (Chase Play)
HDD
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in
progress from the start, without having to wait until the
recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the
recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress. You can watch anything else already on the
HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using
the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on
page 89).
DVR-640H-AV only: Chase Play is not possible when DV is
the recording input.
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.
2
VIDEO IN
Press repeatedly to select one of the external
inputs to record from.
The current input is shown on-screen and in the front
panel display:
• AV2/L1 – Input 12
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
DVR-640H-AV only:
• DV – DV input (front panel)
Check that the Audio In settings for DV Input, External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them
(see Audio In on page 130).
Note
1.You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.
2.This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 130).
82
En
Recording
3
REC MODE
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 77 for detailed information.
HDD/DVD
4
Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
1 Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 130).
Press to start recording.
• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.
• If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 76 for more details.
Set the recording quality.
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 77 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 130 for more on this.
REC
5
REC MODE
English
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
06
4
HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’, then ‘DV Record’ from
the Home Menu.
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
ENTER
Recording from a DV camcorder
DVR-640H-AV only
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the
recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder
and this recorder.
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or
‘Record to DVD’.
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
, , , , , / and / buttons.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
DV IN jack is setup (see DV Input on page 130).
Important
ENTER
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a
component connected to the DV IN jack.
• You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
• For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing
the camcorder to the place you want to start
recording from and setting the camcorder to playpause.
Stop
1.02.22
Stop
Control with these
buttons
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
HDD
Rem.
SP
(2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your
camcorder instead and recording will start
immediately.
83
En
06
Recording
• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter
marker is inserted every time there is a break in the
timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for
example.
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.
Frequently Asked Questions
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
Finalizing a disc
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can
be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped
with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.2
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 123 before starting the steps below.
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However,
if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc,
then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW,
you can still record and edit even after finalizing.
although the title menu will disappear if you do so.
Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.
• There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on
page 130) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.1
Important
• Once you’ve finalized a Video mode or DVD+R disc,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 124 for how to do
this.
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc
can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even
after finalizing.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode and DVD+R discs. A number of
players (including many Pioneer models) can also play
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not.
Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs,
although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may
be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the
manual that came with the player to check what kinds of
discs it will play.
When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R disc, a title
menu is created from which you can select titles when
you play the disc. There are a number of different styles
of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the
disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles
and start playback.
• Video mode DVD-R DL discs and DVD+R DL discs
must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/
players. Note however that some recorders/players
will not play even finalized dual-layer discs.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
2
HOME MENU
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Screen’.
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next
Disc Setup
Basic
Finalize
Next Screen
Initialize
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Start
Optimize HDD
Note
1.If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 130).
2.If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 134 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
84
En
Recording
4
For Video mode and DVD+R/+RW discs
only, select a title menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to
start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected
on any DVD player.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode
recording, you must initialize it before recording anything
on the disc.
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in
order to erase the contents of the disc.
English
ENTER
06
Important
Finalize
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc
will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there
is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in
a different format if it was originally initialized on an
older DVD recorder.
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These
discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on
this recorder.
5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
During finalization:
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/
+RW disc is going to take more than around four
minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around
four minutes before completion, the option to cancel
disappears.
• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t reinitialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.
HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home
1
Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR
Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.
Disc Setup
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R
disc.
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. Video mode
DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to
20 minutes.
Initializing recordable DVD discs
Basic
VR Mode
Start
Initialize
Video Mode
Start
Finalize
Initialize DVD+RW
Start
Optimize HDD
ENTER
3
Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except
DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to 1 hour).
Initializing Disc
Pr 1
1 min left
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode
recording or VR mode recording.1
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By
default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 132 if you want
to change the default to Video mode.
Note
1.If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
85
En
07
Playback
Chapter 7
Playback
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 88.
Introduction
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor
buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN button.
PLAY
3
Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of
every screen shows which buttons do what.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/
DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of
some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
• There may be a slight pause when playback switches
from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.
• Many functions are not available when a Video CD is
playing in PBC mode. Stop playback, then press for non-PBC playback.
• See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV) on page 115.
STOP
4
Basic playback
ALL
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD.
Important
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any
kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is
specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is
specified.
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t
allow certain playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.
HDD/DVD
1
Select the HDD or DVD for playback.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.
Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.
OPEN/CLOSE
2
Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a doublesided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
86
En
Start playback.
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc
menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for
Video CD menus.
Press to stop playback.
5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
Playback
07
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last stopped.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last stopped. Playback
automatically stops after the end of a title is
reached.
PLAY
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
STOP
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
PAUSE
PREV
NEXT
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
/TUNE+
SR+
2
3
ENTER
/ST+
5
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
0
CLEAR
ENTER
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
/
/
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
MENU
ENTER
RETURN
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the front
panel CH +/– buttons.)
DVD+R/DVD+RW only: PREV may not
always skip to the previous title.
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the number
buttons to select numbered items in the disc
menu.
VR mode only: During playback, enter a title
number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only: (Commercial
back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of ten
minutes forward or three minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start slowmotion playback. Press repeatedly to change
the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
PREV
NEXT
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
English
Playing DVD discs
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the front
panel CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a title number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
0
CLEAR
ENTER
CM
BACK
ENTER
CM
SKIP
/
/
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of ten minutes forward or three
minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start slowmotion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video
disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this
recorder will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc menu.)
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVDVideo disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
Press to return to the previous level of a DVDVideo disc menu.
87
En
07
Playback
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3 files.
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
Press to start playback.
PLAY
STOP
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.2
Press to stop playback.
PAUSE
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
PLAY
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
STOP
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
PREV
NEXT
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
Except WMA: Press to start scanning. Press
again to increase the scanning speed. (There
are two scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next track (or folder
for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you
can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.)
PAUSE
During playback, enter a track number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
PREV
NEXT
0
CLEAR
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only: You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing PLAY.
(Press STOP again to cancel the resume
function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next track.
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page. (During
playback you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
ENTER
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
SOUND
0
CLEAR
ENTER
CM
BACK
ENTER
CM
SKIP
/
RETURN
During playback, enter a track number
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use
to select numbered menu items.
Video CD only: Each press skips backward/
forward progressively up to a maximum of
ten minutes forward or three minutes back.
Note that this function doesn’t work when
playing in PBC mode.
While paused, press and hold to start slowmotion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward only).
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on
page 94).
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing to start playback instead of PLAY.
88
En
Playback
07
Playing DivX video files
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last stopped. Playback
of titles (DivX files) proceeds in alphabetical
order.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV
NEXT
/
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next title. (During
playback you can also use the front panel CH
+/– buttons.)
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view
information on titles.
See also Editing on page 96 for more on editing
recordable discs.
HDD/DVD
1
2
Select the hard disk drive or DVD.
DISC
NAVIGATOR
While paused, press to advance one frame.
Press and hold to start slow motion playback
(press repeatedly to change the slow motion
play speed).
Open the Disc Navigator.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PMPr 4 2ch
9
MAIN
SUB
+
SUBTITLE
MAIN
SUB
+
Press to display the playback audio type;
press repeatedly to change the playback
audio type.
20:00
20:00
SP
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12 Pr 7
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11 Pr 2
All Genres
MENU
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
7
Press to display subtitle information; press
repeatedly to change subtitles.
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12 Pr 9
2h00m(1.0G)
8
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Recent first
AUDIO
English
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DivX video files.
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Browse the list of titles.
• Use the / buttons to display the previous/
next page of titles.
• To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title
see Set Thumbnail on page 100.
• For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a
thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set
Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 134.
4
ENTER
Play the highlighted title.
• You can also select Play from the command menu
options.
89
En
Playback
07
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the
same time.
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all
navigated in the same way.
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc.
Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder
that you want to play.
ENTER
1
Display the View Options panel.
CD
WMA/MP3
Divx
The View Options panel
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Style
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PMPr 4 2ch
2
20:00
20:00
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12 Pr 9
SP
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
3
All Genres
All Genres
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12 Pr 7
MENU
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11 Pr 2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’,
then press ENTER to see the available view options.
• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view
• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first),
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest
first)
• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre
ENTER
3
Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
DVD-Video
1
CD
HOME MENU
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX
Display the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which
takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
90
En
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Recent first
NEW first
Genre
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
03.Dance
10Titles
11
4 Titles
4 Titles
Sort order
Disc Navigator
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/
MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the
playback area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX.
This can only be done while the disc is stopped.
Playback
07
Frame advance/frame reverse
A L L (except WMA)
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backward.1
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc3 or the
HDD frame-by-frame.
1 During playback, start reverse or forward
scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only
use frame advance.
2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning
speed.
There are four scanning speeds available when playing
HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also
possible with HDD and DVD video.2
1
There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.
3
English
Scanning discs
PAUSE
/
2 press.
Pause playback.
/
Back up or advance one frame with each
PLAY
Resume normal playback.
PLAY
3
Resume normal playback.
The Play Mode menu
Playing in slow motion
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX
titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.
There is no sound when playing in slow motion.
ALL
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
Press
PLAY MODE
MAIN
SUB
+
to display the Play Mode menu.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
PAUSE
1
Pause playback.
/
/
/
/
2 Press and hold to start slow motion
reverse or forward play.
3 Press repeatedly to change the slow
motion speed.
The current playback speed is indicated on-screen.
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or
PLAY MODE.
PLAY
4
Resume normal playback.
Note
1 • Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs.
• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear
PCM is output from the optical digital output, Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when
using other scan speeds.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during
forward SCAN 1).
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
3 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
91
En
Playback
07
Search Mode
2 ENTER With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at
the point you want the loop to start.
ALL
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time1 or by title/chapter/
folder/track number.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
ENTER
1
Select ‘Search mode’ from the Play Mode
menu, then choose a search option.
The available search options depend on the type of disc.
SET UP
1
/ST–
4
MCACC
7
/TUNE+
2
ENTER
5
SR+
3
/ST+
6
/TUNE– TEST TONE
8
9
ADVANCED
0
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/track
number or a search time.
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Input Time
0.01.00
3 ENTER With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the
point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be
in the same title.
• To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B
Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such
as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Repeat play
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and
30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6.
ALL
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
program list (see Program play below).3
ENTER
3
ENTER
Start playback.
A-B Repeat
DVD HDD
CD
1
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu,
then choose a repeat play mode.
Play Mode
Video CD DivX
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.2
ENTER
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from
the Play Mode menu.
En
Disc
Title
Chapter
Off
• To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from
the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu
OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Note
1 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
2 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.
3 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
92
Repeat
Repeat
Repeat
Repeat
Playback
07
Program play
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters1/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode
menu, then ‘Input/Edit Program’.
The Input/Edit Program screen varies according to the
disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.
Program
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title
Title
Title
Title
(01-03)
01
02
03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
English
HDD DVD-Video
• To repeat play the program list, select Program
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play on page 92).
• From the Program menu you can also:
Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved
program list
Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
Erase Program List – Erases the program list and
turns off program play
Displaying and switching subtitles
DVD-Video DivX
ENTER
2
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for
the current step in the program list.
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.2
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
SUBTITLE
• MAIN SUB +
Select/change the subtitle language.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR.
3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
PLAY
4
Play the program list.
Program play remains active until you cancel program
play, erase the program list, eject the disc or switch off
the recorder.
Tip
• To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press HOME
MENU or PLAY MODE.
• During program play, press to skip to the next
program step.
Note
1 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on
the disc.
2 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 131.
93
En
07
Playback
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left channel only
R – Right channel only
DVD-Video DivX
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two
or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you
can switch the soundtrack during playback.1
CD
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
Video CD WMA/MP3
Stereo – Stereo (default)
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
AUDIO
• MAIN SUB +
Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
Super VCD
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
output.
Switching camera angles
Switching audio channels
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
CD
Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
For HDD2 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)
channel, or both (L+R).3
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as
well as individual channels in each.
DVD-Video
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator on page 133).
•
ANGLE
Switch the camera angle.
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
MAIN
SUB
+
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
AUDIO
• MAIN SUB +
Press repeatedly to display/switch the
audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated onscreen.
Note
1 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 131.
2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 133).
3 • When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 131) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
• When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer—see Dual mono
setting on page 32.
94
En
Playback
07
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
DISPLAY
•
Display/change the on-screen information.
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel program
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button to switch
between the two kinds of display.
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD DVD
0h08m left
HDD
Remain –h––m
Stop
DVD-RW Video
Relative playback position
ABC Pr 1
Stereo
Copy Once
: Comedy shows
Indicates copy-protected material
Indicates a multi-angle scene
Play
DVD-R Video
Title Name
3–2
0. 00. 15
Chapter Time 0. 00. 21
Chapter Total 0h01m52s
4.32Mbps
!
: 21/11 Football match
Indicates the data transfer rate
• See Switching camera angles on page 94 for more on
multi-angle scene switching.
• When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
Remain 0h52m
Stop
Recording time
0h35m
Tip
DVD-RW Video
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Rem.
DVD Mode
• To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
HDD and removable disc activity display
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Finalized
English
Displaying disc information onscreen
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a
12 cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting.
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time.
This is because of the slightly different frame rates of
TV broadcasts versus DVD.
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV program contains copy control
information.
95
En
08
Editing
Chapter 8
Editing
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
HDD
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
(VR mode)
Original
Play List
Create (page 98)
Play (page 98)
Erase (page 98)
Edit > Title Name (page 99)
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 100)
Edit > Erase Section (page 100)
Edit > Divide (page 101)
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 101)
Edit > Set Genre (page 102)
Edit > Lock (page 103)
Edit > Move (page 103)
Edit > Combine (page 104)
Genre Name (page 104)
Multi-Mode (page 105)
Undo (page 105)
*1
*1
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
96
En
Editing
08
HDD/DVD
•
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video
content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD-R/
-RW discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as
video content on the internal hard disk drive.
Press to switch between the HDD and DVD
Disc Navigator screens.
• If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVDRAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting
Play List from the view options panel (press , then
select Play List from the view options, then Play List).
English
The Disc Navigator screen
Important
Disc Navigator (DVD)
• Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional information
about the TV system settings on page 134.
Style
101
4 Titles
4 Titles
PlayList
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
9
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Original
Original
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
HDD
SP
Remain
0h30m
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be
played.
1
Select the HDD or DVD.
2
Display the Disc Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home
Menu.
View options panel
Title list
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
9
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
All Genres
Available
recording time
Selected
title
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
Press to display the command menu panel.
Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the
menus.
PREV
Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
Some editing commands ask you whether you want to
keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video
Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.
Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit
point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5 to 1
second. On the other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video
mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW.
1h00m(1.0G)
Title thumbnail Title information Command
menu panel
•
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Editing accuracy
DISC
NAVIGATOR
•
• Titles on the HDD marked with a
icon are
recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
3
HDD/DVD
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD genres
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content you can assign different genres
to titles. There are 14 genres in total, including ten userdefinable ones that you can name as you like.
NEXT
When in the title list, press to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles than can
be displayed.
DISPLAY
•
Press to change the title information displayed
in the title list.
97
En
Editing
08
Create
Erase
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
Before you can use this command, make sure that the
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the
left.
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.1
ENTER
1
panel.
Select ‘Create’ from the command menu
Disc Navigator (DVD)
0Titles
No title
Play
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Edit
Play List
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a
DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not
result in any more free space on the disc.
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to erase.
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
ENTER
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
2
panel.
Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu
ENTER
3
ENTER
2
Select an original title to add to the Play
List.
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as
necessary to the Play List.
Play
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Tip
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER.
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
Use this function to start playback of a title.
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to play.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Play’ from the command menu
panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
Edit
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP Play
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
Note
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
98
En
Editing
08
Title Name
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to
40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/
+RW discs.
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return
to the main Disc Navigator screen.
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
English
ENTER
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
ENTER
1
rename).
Highlight the title you want to name (or
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the
command menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr Title
4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
name SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
20:00
20:00
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
Erase
Edit Section
PrDivide
9 SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
8
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
Genre Name
Lock
Pr 7
All Genres
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
Cancel
7
19:00
19:00
HDD
SP
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
Pr 2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Remain
30h30m
ENTER
Input a name for the selected title.
Input Title Name
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
CAPS
small
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
\ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
c £
OK
Clear
O
ø
ß$%
= > _ &
± { _| } ~ ¡
– ® ˚
1 3
/2 /4 ¿ `
UUUUY
6 7 8 9 <
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x
¨ © a– << ¬
¸ 1 –o 1/4
<<
3
Space
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the /
buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lowercase, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (/
).
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name).
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
99
En
Editing
08
Set Thumbnail
Erase Section
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in
that title.
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording
made from the TV.
ENTER
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to change
the thumbnail picture for.
1
Highlight the title containing the section
you want to erase.
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the
command menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
3
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
!
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 4Title
SPnameSP
11/29Mon
2ch
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
20:00
20:00
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
Pr 9
SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
8
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
All Genres
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Erase
Edit Section
Divide
Genre Name
Lock
Pr 7
SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Pr 2
Video Mode Compatible Editing
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Rec. time
2h00m
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
Frame Accurate Editing
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 97.
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
shows the start of the section.
OK
OK
Exit
Exit
Erase Section (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP buttons.
Rec. time
2h00m
10-1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
ENTER
4
From
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.
To
Exit
ENTER
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find
the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
100
En
Editing
08
5 ENTER Press to divide the title at the current
playback position.
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
!
English
ENTER
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel,.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
Yes
No
Divide
Chapter Edit
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to divide.
1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command
menu panel.
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
!
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
DVD RECORDER
3
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
HDD only: Select the type of edit.
!
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
Video Mode Compatible Editing
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 97.
Frame Accurate Editing
4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find the place you want to divide the title.
• For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 97.
4
Divide Title (HDD)
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Rec. time
2h00m
Select the command you want:
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press ENTER.
10–1 00.00.09.15
Play Pause
Divide
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Cancel
Rec. time
Chapters
1–1
1h00m
5
0.00.00
Play
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
disc or 99 chapters per HDD title).
101
En
08
Editing
• Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Set Genre
HDD
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.
Move command only: Select the destination for the
chapter, and press ENTER.
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to assign a
genre to.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Erase
1h00m
Rec. time
Move
0h01m
Chapter
Cancel
001
002
003
004
005
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the
command menu panel.
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
• Combine3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr Title
4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
nameSP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
8
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
7
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
Pr 9
1h00m
Genre Name
Lock
Pr 7
All Genres
1
2
3
4
5
SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Exit
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Recent first
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Rec. time
Erase
Edit Section
Divide
20:00
20:00
Pr 2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
ENTER
ENTER
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc
Navigator screen.
3
Select a genre for the title.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr Title
4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
nameSP
4 Titles
9
20:00
20:00
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
8
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
Recent first
No
Category
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
Movies
Erase
Edit Section
Sport
Edit Chapter
Pr 9Children
SP
Divide
Other
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
Free1
Genre Name
Lock
Free2
All Genres
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Pr 7
SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
Pr 2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
102
En
Editing
08
Move
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
Original only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
English
Lock
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to move.
Important
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
1
Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).
10Titles
1
11/29 MON
MON 7:00PM
7:00PM
11/29
Play
11/29Mon 7:00PM
7:00PM 2ch
2ch
SP
11/29Mon
SP
Title name
2
12/2 THU 10:00PM
Divide
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Erase
EditSection
ENTER
Play List
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command
menu panel.
3
12/3 FRI 8:00PM
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch
101
12/3 FRI 11:00PM
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
10Titles
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr Title
4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
nameSP
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Set
Thumbnail
4 Titles
9
20:00
20:00
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
8
Erase
Edit Section
Divide
Pr 9
Recent first
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
All Genres
ENTER
SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
SetMulti-Mode
Genre
3
Select a new position for the title.
Genre Name
Lock
Pr 7
SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
SP
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
4
Disc Navigator (HDD)
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
Combine
Pr 2
Title to move
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
MENU
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
1h00m(1.0G)
Insert position
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
103
En
Editing
08
Combine
Genre Name
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only
HDD
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.
Use this command to rename one of the ten userdefinable genres (Free 1 to Free 10).
ENTER
1
Highlight the title you want to combine.
This title will remain in the same place after combining
with another title.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
ENTER
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the
command menu panel.
101
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
Edit
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
8
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
7
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Recent first
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
SP
Title name
All Genres
Erase
Set
Thumbnail
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
20:00 FRI 3/12
Divide
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Chapter Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Move
Genre Name
Combine
Play List
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Multi-Mode
Multi-Mode
0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Erase
EditSection
2
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
1h00m(1.0G)
Cancel
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
names.
1h00m(1.0G)
Select one of the user-definable genre
Disc Navigator (HDD)
ENTER
3
Select another title to combine with the
first.
This title will be appended to the first title selected.
101
Erase
Free2
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
2
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
Free3
Edit
Free4
SP
Free5
Pr 9
8
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
All Genres
Free7 Name
Genre
Pr 7
SP
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
10Titles
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
7:00PM
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
2h00m(1.0G)
Multi-Mode
Free6
7
11
20:00
20:00
Recent first
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended
to title 1:
Disc Navigator (DVD)
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 4 2ch
SP
Free1
11/29Mon
SP
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
Pr 2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Play List
2h00m(1.0G)
3
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
4
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
ENTER
MENU
3
Input a name for the genre.
• The name can be up to 12 characters long.
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
Input Genre Name
1h00m(1.0G)
Free 1
DN O OOO
0 1 2 3 4 5
+ – /@ [
c £ \ §
2 3
´ µ¶ ·
ENTER
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
!
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
OK
Clear
øUUUUY ß$%
6 7 8 9 <= > _ &
¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚
¸ 1 –o 1/4 1/2 3/4 ¿ `
O
<<
CAPS
small
Space
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
Yes
No
ENTER
4
104
En
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit.
Editing
08
Undo
HDD
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at
once, for example.
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you
can only undo the last edit you made)1.
English
Multi-Mode
ENTER
ENTER
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command
menu panel.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
•
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu
panel.
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
10Titles
23:00 FRI
11/29
MON3/12
7:00PM
Play
23:00 Fri 7:00PM
3/12 Pr 4 2ch
SP
11/29Mon
SP
Disc Navigator (DVD)
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
9
20:00
20:00
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
1
Edit
Pr 9
Recent first
SP
4 Titles
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
19:00
19:00
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
Pr 7
All Genres
SP
Play List
Pr 2
2h00m(1.0G)
Create
Multi-Mode
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
Edit
2h00m(1.0G)
Genre Name
8
0Titles
11/29 MON 7:00PM
Play
No title
11/29Mon
7:00PM 2ch SP
Undo
1h00m(1.0G)
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
DVD
VR Mode
Remain
0h30m
ENTER
2
Select titles from the title list.
Selected titles are marked with a .
ENTER
3
Select the command that you want
applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
101
Multi-Mode
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12
Pr 4
FRI 3/12
Fri 3/12
SP
Lock
Unlock
22:00
22:00
THU 2/12
Thu 2/12
Change Genre
Pr 9
Recent first
SP
2h00m(1.0G)
8
All Genres
Single Mode
Pr 7
SP
Cancel
1h00m(1.0G)
7
HDD
SP
Remain
30h30m
• I can’t edit my disc!
Erase
2h00m(1.0G)
20:00
20:00
19:00
19:00
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the
titles are no longer displayed, but the content
remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.
3Titles
4 Titles
9
Frequently asked questions
• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?
MON 29/11
Mon 29/11
Pr 2
SP
1h00m(1.0G)
You may find that as the available recording time is
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no
longer possible. This is because information about
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is
automatically exited.
Note
1 Except DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs. These have only one level of undo.
105
En
09
Copying and backup
Chapter 9
Copying and backup
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on
page 106 for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 107
for detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum
copying times on page 138 for more on copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is
always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the
original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put
into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter
settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 132).
Restrictions on copying
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy
Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1
or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode
DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM
on page 76 for more on this). Only one instance of a copyonce protected title can be added to the Copy List, and
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copyonce protected).
106
En
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in
whatever recording mode is currently set.
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when
trying to copy from the HDD.
REC MODE
1
If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD,
select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title
playing will not result in a better quality recording.
ONE TOUCH COPY
2
Press during playback to copy the current
title.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied.
Copying and backup
09
Copying to the HDD
• The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the
title.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
disc.
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
• If some part of the title being copied is copyprotected, copying will start, but the copy-protected
portions will not be copied.
ONE TOUCH COPY
•
Press and hold for more than a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the precopy figure.
English
• High-speed copying is used when copying from the
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 106.
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy
Copying to DVD
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also
copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/
-RW or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters of
a name are copied.
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the
actual content is not being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
Important
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-R/
-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
•
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 134).
Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1
) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
VR mode
DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of
material.
• When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes
cannot be high-speed copied to a Video mode disc.
Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM.
• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be highspeed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR
mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM.
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 148) will erase the
Copy List.
1
Load a recordable DVD.
• It is possible to complete the following steps without
having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an
uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are
slightly different.
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the
copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to single-layer
DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use
DVD+R DL discs for titles over 8 hours.
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode
cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch
Copy.
Note
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
107
En
Copying and backup
09
2
HOME MENU
• When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title
if high-speed copying is possible.
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘HDD DVD’.
If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 5
below.
Depending on the title1, high-speed copying may not be
possible to a Video mode disc.
6
Press to display the command menu panel.
HDD DVD
The Command Menu panel
DVD/CD HDD
Copy
Disc Back-up
4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’.
Recent first
All Genres
1>2>3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED
MON
S AT
THU
WED
MON
FRI
WED
29/03
27/03
25/03
23/03
22/03
20/03
17/03
15/03
20:00
21:00
23:00
22:00
20:00
13:00
21:00
20:00
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports
SP
Pr 2
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Continue Using Previous Copy List
Create New Copy List
7
Wed29/03
Mon 27/03
S a t 25/03
Thu 23/03
Wed 22/03
Mon 20/03
F r i 17/03
Wed 15/03
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
Return
Next
4.3G
4.3G
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
Copy
• If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List,
skip to step 10 below.
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Select Title
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
2 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Return
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
Next
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
ENTER
5
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a
title and press ENTER to add).
Copy
1>2>3
Select Title
Recent first
All Genres
4.3G
4.3G
8 To edit a title, highlight it using the /
buttons, then press ENTER.
8 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED
MON
S AT
THU
WED
MON
FRI
WED
29/03
27/03
25/03
23/03
22/03
20/03
17/03
15/03
20:00
21:00
23:00
22:00
20:00
13:00
21:00
20:00
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00
1h00m(2.0G)
Sports
SP
Pr 2
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Wed29/03
Mon 27/03
S a t 25/03
Thu 23/03
Wed 22/03
Mon 20/03
F r i 17/03
Wed 15/03
Pr 2
Pr 4
Pr 9
Pr 6
Pr 2
Pr 9
Pr 4
Pr 2
Return
Copy
Next
0.0G
4.3G
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1>2>3
Title Edit
1 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
Erase
2 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Title Name
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Return
Next
Cancel
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to
the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD or
DVD+R/+RW:
• When adding titles that contain copy-once protected
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
A menu of editing commands appears:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 98).
• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List
(see Title Name on page 99).
• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section
on page 100).
Note
1 • Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
• LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
108
En
Copying and backup
09
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
Divide on page 101).
• Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into
one (see Combine on page 104).
• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title
(see Chapter Edit on page 101):
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/Change the
chapter order.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title
(see Set Thumbnail on page 100).
• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy
(see Recording Mode on page 110).
• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied
when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see
Bilingual on page 110).
ENTER
Display the command menu panel.
ENTER
10
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
Copy
1>2>3
1
2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP
Return
Next
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Copy
HDD DVD (Video Mode)
1>2>3
Start Copy
HDD
DVD-RW
Video Mode
Return
Recording Mode
Copy Time
0h 16m
Input Disc Name
Recording Mode
Disc Name
High-Speed
Finalize
Finalize
Off
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and
the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total
bar will be purple.
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if
the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is
already full.
Important
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc or a DVD-Video is loaded.
As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function, however
(See One Touch Copy on page 106).
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
2 Title
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Title Edit
ENTER
11
Copying from DVD to HDD
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
9
• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a
Video mode DVD or DVD+R after copying.2 Select a
title menu style from the following screen.
English
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 103).
4.3G
4.3G
There are several options available from the next screen:
• The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List and
Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 148).
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 110).1
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc
or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that
of naming titles; see Title Name on page 99.)
Note
1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy.
2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
109
En
Copying and backup
09
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
Recording Mode
ENTER
ENTER
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.
2
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select a Copy List type.
• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
ENTER
2
• XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy List is
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than
the original, the copy will not be better quality than
the original.)
ENTER
4
Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a
title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1 to MN323 or LPCM) from the
Recording Quality box that appears.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the title edit screen.
• Optimized2,4 – The recording quality is automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in realtime.
ENTER
6
Select a title to edit.
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 98).
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 103).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
• Cancel – Exit the menu.
Select a recording mode for the copy.
• High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
Bilingual
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
ENTER
1
Select the title containing the audio you
want to change.
ENTER
7
Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the copy options screen.
• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 110).
ENTER
2
Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command
menu panel.
ENTER
ENTER
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
3
Select a bilingual audio option.
Note
1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers
of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto
Chapter (Video)) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 132.
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.
110
En
Copying and backup
* See also Copyright on page 106.
This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy
of a finalized Video mode disc or DVD+R/+RW. The data
is copied first to the hard disk drive1, then on to another
recordable DVD disc.
5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc
and load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t
have to be blank, although the previous contents of the
disc will be erased in the backup process.
English
Using disc backup
09
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
HOME MENU Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from
1
the Home Menu.
ENTER
2
Select a backup option.
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing date
Erase back-up date
There are three backup options:
• Start new disc backup – Start making a backup of a
disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the backup data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
• Erase backup data – Erase the backup data on the
HDD.
recordable disc
Start
Cancel
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW ver.
1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed
up to DVD+R/+RW discs.
6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of.
You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode
discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs (excluding
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).
Disc Back-up
No Disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Cancel
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can reinitialize it in order to make it usable again—see
Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 85.)
7 After the recorder has finished recording the
backup disc, you can select whether to make another
backup of the same data or exit.
ENTER
4
OK to start?
Select ‘Start’.
Disc Back-up
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Disc back-up finished.
Start reading?
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start
Cancel
• To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
• You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
Start
Cancel
• Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another backup copy,
return to step 6 above.
Note
1 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
111
En
09
Copying and backup
8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the
HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes
No
• If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD,
you can make backup copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
112
En
Using the Jukebox
10
Chapter 10
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s
HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your
CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CDR/-RW/-ROM or a USB device. Once on the HDD, you can
name albums, assign them a genre, and set tracks that
you don’t want to play to Jump.
Copying music to the HDD
The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD
audio is copied in real-time, while WMA and MP3 files are
copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each
CD1 as an album.
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play.
Copying files from a USB device to
the HDD
DVR-640H-AV only
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB
device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.
1
2
Connect the USB device.
HOME MENU
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with
the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but
you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on
page 114).
3
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order
they appear on the CD. When copying CD audio, you can
copy them in some other order using the program play
mode. See Program play on page 93 for how to do this.
4
Select ‘Copy Album’ from the command
menu panel.
ENTER
Select ‘Listen to Music from USB Device’.
ENTER
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot
be copied to a recordable DVD disc.
Important
English
Using the Jukebox
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to
the HDD.
• While copying CD audio, no other recorder operation
is possible.
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device are
copyable/displayable.
• When copying CD audio, scheduled timer recordings
will not start until copying is complete.
• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.
1
2
Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD.
HOME MENU
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
Playing music from the Jukebox
You can select albums or individual tracks from the
Jukebox to play.2
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
ENTER
3
Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are
copied to the HDD.
• You can also start copying by starting playback of the
CD (including program play) and then pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY.
• To cancel copying an audio CD, press and hold ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
• To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc, press ENTER.
ENTER
2
Select a Jukebox option.
• Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs that have been
copied to the HDD.
• Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit – Listen to WMA
or MP3 files that have been stored on the HDD.
• Listen to Music from USB Device – Listen to music
from an external USB device.
Note
1 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital.
2 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.
113
En
Using the Jukebox
10
• Genre
ENTER
3
Select what you want to play.
The screen below shows CD albums stored on the HDD:
Jukebox
Album name
Best
Album1
4
Album2
1
Erase
5
Album3
2
Edit
6
Album4
3
Play Mode
7
Album5
4
8
Album6
5
9
Album7
10
Album8
By number
All Genres
HDD
4
Jazz
6
Classical
Album6
5
7
Album7
8
Album8
Remain
60h30m
Info for selected album
Genre Name
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
Total 12 1.14.58
1-10
classical
0.03.58
All Genres – All albums are displayed.
Genre Name
7
1-10
Play Mode
Album5
HDD
0.03.58
Edit
Pop
5
Genres
All All
Genres
Remain
60h30m
6
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12 1.14.58
Erase
2
3
Play
ALL
Play
1
Album4
10Albums
3
ALL
4
Genre Rock
Jukebox
10Albums
12/1
1 Album1
Sort order
2 Album2
All Genres
By First
number
New
No Category
3 Album3
Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are
displayed.
Playback status
• If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are
not set to Jump will play.
• If you want to start playback from a selected track in
an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press to enter the track list then select a track to play.
Editing Jukebox albums
A number of commands are available for editing and
changing the playback behaviour of albums.
1
HOME MENU
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’ or ‘Listen to
Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit’.
Changing the album view
ENTER
1
From the album list, display the view
options menu panel.
ENTER
3
Select what you want to edit.
ENTER
4
Select an edit function from the
command menu panel.
• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an
album are selected, the whole album is erased).
ENTER
2
Select a view option.
Jukebox
10Albums
1
Sort order
2
By number
Recent
New
First
ByFirst
favorite
3
By album
4
Genre
12/1
Album1
Album2
ALL
Play
1
Erase
Album3
2
Edit
Album4
3
Play Mode
Genres 5
All All
Genres
Cancel
6
Album5
4
Album6
5
7
Album7
8
Album8
HDD
Remain
60h30m
Genre Name
• Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the genre for the
album.
6
7
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep
classical
Total 12 1.14.58
1-10
0.03.58
• Sort order
• Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums
and tracks.
By favorite – Most often listened to music appears
at the top of the list.
• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters
for a genre. See page Title Name on page 99 for how
to enter names.
Note
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
En
• Edit > Jump Set1 – Set a track to jump so that it
doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel
the Jump setting).
By number – Albums are listed by the album
number.
By album – Albums are listed alphabetically.
114
• Edit > Edit Title – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the album. See page Title Name on
page 99 for how to enter names.
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
11
Chapter 11
From the Photo Viewer you can view JPEG photos and
picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CDROM/R/RW, or on a USB-equipped digital camera.1 You
can also import files and save them to the recorder’s
HDD or a DVD-R/RW disc.
Locating JPEG picture files
1
HOME MENU Select ‘Photo Viewer’ from the Home
Menu.
English
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
ENTER
3
Select the folder containing the files you
want to view, copy or edit.
Currently selected
folder in folder list
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
File information
Currently selected
thumbnail
1920 x 1440
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
ENTER
2
Select the location of the files you want
to view or edit.
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/3
View/Edit photos on the HDD
Pages in
folder list
View photos on a CD/DVD
Incompatible/
unknown file
Pages in
file view
View photos on a USB device
Copy photos from a USB device
• View/Edit photos on the HDD – View or edit photos
already stored on the recorder’s HDD.
• View photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a
Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, or DVD-R/RW.
• View photos on a USB device – View photos on a
digital camera (or other USB device) connected to
the USB port.
• Copy photos from a USB device – Copy all photos
on a connected USB device to the HDD.
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created
disc compatibility on page 48).
Playing a slideshow
ENTER
1
Select a folder from the folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
• To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder,
skip to step 4 after pressing ENTER.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Selection’ from the menu.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
• You can also select a folder, then press to get to
the thumbnail view area.
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible
to view them all using the Reload function (see the following page).
115
En
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
11
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
ENTER
3
Select a thumbnail.
• Use the and buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ from the menu.
• You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY
to start playing the slideshow.
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the
picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,
2 x zoom and 4 x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed onscreen.
ENTER
• Use PREV / NEXT to display the previous/
next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.
2
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
Rotating an image
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
• During playback of the slideshow you can listen to
WMA/MP3 files in the Slideshow genre (see Editing
Jukebox albums on page 114)
Use to move the zoomed area.
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
ANGLE
• MAIN SUB +
Press during the slideshow to rotate
the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in
increments of 90º.
STOP
5
Press to return to the thumbnail view area.
• You can also use the RETURN button.
RETURN
6
Press to return to the folder view area.
• With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted, you can
use the button.
• To exit the Photo Viewer, press HOME MENU.
Importing files to the HDD
You can import files and save them on to the HDD2 from
a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the
HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print
them out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible
printer.
Reloading files from a disc or USB device
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
ENTER
1
Select the location of folders/files you
want to import.
To import a whole folder, press ENTER here and skip to
step 4 below.
ENTER
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117.
1
Navigate to the last entry in the folder list
(‘Read next: ...’).
2 ENTER Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99
folders from the disc or connected USB device.
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in
the images.1
ENTER
2
3
Select ‘File Selection’ from the menu.
Select a file to import, then press ENTER..
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders below.
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Photo Viewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the Photo Viewer again, it
will resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.)
2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/RW.
116
En
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
11
4
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
File
Date/Time
CD/DVD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
1
001. 12/12 TUE
2
004. 12/15 FRI
4
5
7
8
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
Copy to HDD
Print
6
006. 12/17 SUN
006. 12/17 SUN
1/2
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
008. 12/19 TUE
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
2
007. 12/18 MON
9
Cancel
007. 12/18 MON
1920 x 1440
Size
1
005. 12/16 SAT
Multi-Mode
005. 12/16 SAT
Multi-Mode
002. 12/13 WED
3
Start Slideshow
Copy all to HDD
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
001. 12/12 TUE
1920 x 1440
Size
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
English
• To remove a file/folder from the list, select Cancel
Selection from the menu.
ENTER
Press STOP or ENTER to display the menu
and cancel selection.
1/3
1/3
4
Display the command menu.
ENTER
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the
folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.
• The files will be copied to the HDD with the same
folder structure as the original.
• Importing to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already
the maximum number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).
Selecting multiple files or folders
ENTER
5
Select the command you want to apply to
all the selected items.
Importing files from a USB device
Use this feature to copy all the files on a connected USB
device to this recorder’s HDD.
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files
at once for importing or editing.
Important
• After backing up the pictures on your USB device to
HDD, we recommend verifying that they have been
recorded properly before deleting anything from the
camera.
ENTER
1
Select the folder containing the files you
want to import.
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer
Folder
1
Select ‘Copy photos from a USB device’
from the main Photo Viewer menu.
HDD
12/13 WED
ENTER
001. 12/12 TUE
1
2
Start Slideshow
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
4
5
007. 12/18 MON
New Folder
6
Folder Options
Copy to DVD
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
2
3
File selection
7
8
Multi-Mode
9
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• While the files are being imported, any timer
programs set to start will not begin, and no other
operation is possible.
Cancel
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
Use [][] to select, then press [] to
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.
1/3
ENTER
3
To add a file/folder to the list, select it,
then choose ‘Select’ from the menu.
A checkbox mark () is shown by the item you selected.
• You can also select a file or folder and press STOP
to add it to the list.
117
En
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
11
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW
Editing files on the HDD
This feature allows you just to copy some of the files
stored on HDD to a DVD.
There are a number of commands you can use to edit and
organize your pictures stored on the HDD.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible
with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need
to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD
player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
Important
Creating a new folder
1
ENTER
From the folder list, display the menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘New Folder’.
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the
name F_number.
• A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded.
• Slideshows can contain up to 99 files. If there are
more files than this in the slideshow, multiple
slideshows are created on the disc.
PhotoViewer
Folder
HDD
12/13 WED
001. 12/12 TUE
1
2
4
5
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
New Folder
6
Folder Options
Copy to DVD
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
7
8
Multi-Mode
9
Cancel
007. 12/18 MON
1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
3
File selection
Start Slideshow
002. 12/13 WED
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the
slideshow will become unplayable but the free space
will not increase.
008. 12/19 TUE
Use [][] to select, then press [] to
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.
1/2
1/3
• There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD.
ENTER
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’
from the menu.
Erasing a file or folder
ENTER
ENTER
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117.
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
erase.
• To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117.
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it.
Please be careful!
• You can’t erase files that have been locked.
ENTER
4
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu.
• Folders containing locked files can’t be erased.
Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.
ENTER
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File
names will be PHOT number.
• Note that during copying, any timer programs set to
start will not begin, and no other operation is
possible.
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to
cancel.
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
1
004. 12/15 FRI
4
5
007. 12/18 MON
Print
6
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
3
Start Slideshow
File Options
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
1920 x 1440
Size
2
7
8
9
Cancel
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
118
En
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/3
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
11
ENTER
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
001. 12/12 TUE
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
2
4
5
7
8
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
1920 x 1440
Size
1
002. 12/13 WED
007. 12/18 MON
ENTER
5
3
Start Slideshow
Erase
File Options
Copy
Print
Rename File6
Copy to DVD
Lock
Multi-Mode
9
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the
maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.
Cancel
Cancel
008. 12/19 TUE
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/3
Naming files and folders
1 Select the file or folder you want to rename.
You can’t rename files that have been locked.
ENTER
4
Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s)
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
1/2
4
to.
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
• You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR
when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to
confirm.
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3
Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’.
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
Copying files
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
2
4
5
7
8
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
ENTER
3
Start Slideshow
Erase
File Options
Copy
Print
6
Rename File
Copy to DVD
Lock
Multi-Mode
9
Cancel
Cancel
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117.
1920 x 1440
Size
1
002. 12/13 WED
ENTER
2
English
ENTER
3
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/3
4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.
Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64 characters
long.
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
Locking/Unlocking files
ENTER
3
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’.
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
2
4
5
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
7
1920 x 1440
Size
1
3
Start Slideshow
Erase
File Options
Copy
Print
6
Rename File
Copy to DVD
Lock
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Cancel
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Use the same process to both lock and unlock files.
Locked files are displayed in the Photo Viewer with a
padlock icon.
ENTER
9
8
Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure
and prevent them from being renamed.
1/3
1
Select the file(s) you want to lock (or
unlock).
• To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode;
see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117.
119
En
The PhotoViewer (DVR-640H-AV)
11
ENTER
ENTER
2
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
ENTER
3
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’.
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
Tip
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
004. 12/15 FRI
1
2
4
5
7
8
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
1920 x 1440
Size
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
3
Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or ‘Cancel’ to
cancel.
• Once printing has started, you can cancel by
pressing ENTER.
3
Start Slideshow
Erase
File Options
Copy
Print
6
Rename File
Copy to DVD
Lock
Multi-Mode
• Paper size and layout can be set; the options
available depend on your printer—check the printer
manual for details.
9
Cancel
Cancel
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/2
1/3
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them.
Printing files
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB
port will enable you to print out picture files1 stored on
the HDD, or directly from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you
are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder
before starting.
ENTER
1
Select the file(s) you want to print.
• To print multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 117.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
HDD
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
2
4
5
004. 12/15 FRI
007. 12/18 MON
Print
6
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
3
Start Slideshow
File Options
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
1920 x 1440
Size
1
7
8
9
Cancel
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
1/3
It takes a moment for the recorder to communicate with
the printer. During this time you can press ENTER to
cancel the print.
Note
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
120
En
The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV)
12
Chapter 12
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and
picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW.1
Playing a slideshow
English
The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV)
ENTER
Locating JPEG picture files
HOME MENU Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home
1
Menu.
1
Select a folder from the folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
• You can also select a folder, then press to get to
the thumbnail view area.
ENTER
2
Select the folder containing the files you
want to view.
Currently selected
folder in folder list
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN (or when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
File information
Currently selected
thumbnail
ENTER
PhotoViewer
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
001. 12/12 TUE
1920 x 1440
Size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
2
Select a thumbnail from which to start
the sideshow.
• Use the and buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
• You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY
to start playing the slideshow.
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
• Use PREV / NEXT to display the previous/
next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1/2
Pages in
folder list
Press ENTER to start slideshow. To
return to folder list, press RETURN.
Incompatible/
unknown file
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
1/3
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
Pages in
file view
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 48 and
PC-created disc compatibility on page 48).
STOP
3
Press to return to the thumbnail view area.
• You can also use the RETURN button.
RETURN
4
Press to return to the folder view area.
• With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted, you can
use the button.
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the
Reload function (see the following page).
121
En
The PhotoViewer (DVR-440H-AV)
12
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the
picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2 x zoom and 4 x
zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
ENTER
2
Use to move the zoomed area.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
ANGLE
• MAIN SUB +
Press during the slideshow to rotate
the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in
increments of 90º.
122
En
The Disc Setup menu
13
Chapter 13
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
English
The Disc Setup menu
Lock Disc
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
• Default setting: Off
Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc.
Basic settings
Important
Input Disc Name
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home
1
Menu.
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home
1
Menu.
ENTER
2
‘Off’.
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock disc’ then ‘On’ or
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
On
Initialize
Lock Disc
Off
Finalize
Optimize HDD
ENTER
2
Screen’.
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next
Disc Setup
Basic
Input Disc Name
Initialize
Lock Disc
Next Screen
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select Off.
Initialize settings
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
ENTER
3
Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR
mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/
+RW.
• See Title Name on page 99 for more on navigating the
input screen.
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either
VR mode or Video mode recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be
automatically initialized for recording according to the
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 132).
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize
them for VR mode recording.1
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as
a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVDRAM disc, select VR mode.
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode,
the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
123
En
13
The Disc Setup menu
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 85 for
detailed instructions.
Important
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.
During optimization, playback and recording are not
possible.
Finalize settings
• Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly
optimized.
Finalize
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only
necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu
for the disc.
HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home
1
Menu.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Basic
See Recording from a DV camcorder on page 83 for
detailed instructions.
Start Optimization
Start
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Undo Finalize
DVD-RW
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
1
HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home
Menu.
Initialize HDD
HDD
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the
data on it.
HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home
1
Menu.
ENTER
2
‘Start’.
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then
ENTER
2
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
Disc Setup
Optimize HDD
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will
automatically display a message recommending
optimization.
124
En
Initialize HDD
Optimize
HDD
Initialize
Start
The Video Adjust menu
14
Chapter 14
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture
quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
English
The Video Adjust menu
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Pr 1
Memory1
Detailed Settings
Choosing a preset
ENTER
1
HOME MENU With the recorder stopped, press to
display the Home Menu.
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Pr 1
Motion
Still
ENTER
2
PureCinma
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
3-D Y/C
ENTER
3
Select a preset.
Auto1
Motion
Still
YNR
Off
Max
CNR
Off
Max
White AGC
White Level
Off
Min
Max
Pr 1
Tuner
Detailed Settings
• Use the VIDEO IN button to switch between the builtin TV tuner and the external inputs.
• Use the / buttons to change the channel of
the built-in TV tuner.
There are six presets available:
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes
• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and
Laserdiscs
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP).
You can adjust the following settings:
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto; try
switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.
• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness / colour separation
(NTSC video input only).
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.1
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video input only).
Note
1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.
125
En
The Video Adjust menu
14
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
ENTER
4
Adjust the currently selected setting.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
HOME MENU Press to exit.
5
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Memory1
Detailed Settings
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to
adjust.
Memory1
Prog. Motion
Motion
PureCinma
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
Still
Auto1
YNR
Off
Max
BNR
Off
Max
MNR
Off
Max
Detail
Off
Max
White Level
Min
Max
You can adjust the following settings:
Choosing a preset
• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
HOME MENU With a disc playing (or paused), press to
1
display the Home Menu.
• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually this is best left set to Auto 1; try
switching to Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears
unnatural.
ENTER
2
Select ‘Video Adjust’.
• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
ENTER
3
Select a setting.
TV
Detailed Settings
There are six presets available:
• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible
around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs
• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video playback only).
• Memory2 – user preset 2
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional).
• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
126
En
The Video Adjust menu
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
English
4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
14
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
127
En
15
The Initial Setup menu
Chapter 15
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting
Options
Explanation
Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the
time and date manually.
Basic
Clock Setting
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System
525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
625 System •
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
See also About the input line system on page 134 for more information on this setting.
Power Save
HELP Setting
Setup Navigator
128
En
Mode 1
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna
output when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in
standby.
Off •
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and antenna
inputs are passed along to the outputs.
On •
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on the
remote to manually display the Help screen.)
Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on
page 59.
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
15
Explanation
Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels in
your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen appears
showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. You
can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting option below.
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from
TV
If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your TV is
tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel mapping screen
appears, as above.
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more information.
Manual CH Setting
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto
tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel setting screen:
• Change channel presets using the / buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the Skip setting to On.
• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country or
region.
• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current
channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust
the Level setting.
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the
current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder connected
to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.
Channel Swapping
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so
that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two
presets to swap then press ENTER.
Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input
and the built-in TV tuner. Use the CH +/– buttons to change the preset. On the
default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the
input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may
have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly.
Tuner
Auto Channel
Setting
English
Options
Video In/Out
Input Colour
System
See also About the input colour system on page 135 for more information on this setting.
Component Video
Out
Interlace •
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating
instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see AV1 Out below) must be set to something other than RGB.
AV1 Out
Video •
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video (compatible
with all TVs).
S-Video
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you are using
a long SCART cable.
RGB
Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your TV for
compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and from
external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.
129
En
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 148).
The Component Video Out setting (See Component Video Out above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.
AV2/L1 In
Video •
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite video.
S-Video
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video.
RGB
Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel
Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting page 129.)
When the Input Line System is set to 525 System, RGB cannot be selected.
Even when set to RGB. depending on the connected device, the input signal may be composite video.
NTSC on PAL TV
On •
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Off
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your
TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 134 for related information.
Audio In
NICAM Select
Tuner Level
External Audio
NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch the
audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.)
Normal •
Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.
Stereo •
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo.
Bilingual
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording A/L •
B/R
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in LPCM
mode, from an external source.
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
DV Input
Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two
stereo audio tracks.
Mix
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.
On •
Activates the digital audio output.
Off
Deactivates the digital audio output.
Audio Out
Digital Out
When set to Off, all the following Audio Out settings are grayed out.
130
En
The Initial Setup menu
15
Options
Explanation
Dolby Digital Out
Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.
Dolby Digital PCM
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.
On •
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Off
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your
connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the analog
audio outputs.
DTS Out
96 kHz PCM Out
MPEG Out
Audio DRC
English
Setting
96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played.
MPEG PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.
On
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby
Digital material at low volume.
Off •
Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the
dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer—see Dynamic Range Control on page 32.
Language
OSD Language
English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
Audio Language
English •
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVDVideo playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed.
See Selecting other languages for language options on page 135.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
Subtitle Language
English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for
DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 135.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
Auto Language
On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play
using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a
subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language
preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
131
En
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Explanation
DVD Menu
Language
w/Subtitle
Language •
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle
language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD-Video
menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed.
See Selecting other languages for language options on page 135.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display
On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and
Auto Language preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording
Manual Recording
On (go to setup)
All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 and LPCM modes can be
set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 139 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec
On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to
the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording
will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the recording will start at
MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
Set Thumbnail
Auto Chapter
(Video)
0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of the
title.
30 seconds
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.
No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
DVD-RW Auto Init.
132
En
No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
VR Mode •
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when loaded into the
recorder for the first time.
Video Mode
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.
The Initial Setup menu
15
Options
Explanation
HDD Recording
Format
Video Mode Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you don’t
need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. This
setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a Video mode DVD
as high-speed copy can be used.
English
Setting
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off
setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 130.
Playback
TV Screen Size
4:3 (Letter Box) •
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation
for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for
widescreen material.
16:9
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3
material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override
this setting.
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto •
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.
On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR
mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
Parental Lock
Set Password
In order to change the parental lock level or change the country/area code, set
the password using this option. From the following screen, enter a four-digit
number that will be your password.
Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your existing password and then a
new one from the following screen.
Change Level
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock
level.
Country Code
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a country/area
code.
Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your
password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 148.
Angle Indicator
On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video
disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
On •
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Options
On Screen Display
133
En
15
The Initial Setup menu
Setting
Options
Front Panel Display On •
Off
Explanation
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.
The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights dimly
when setting a timer recording).
Remote Control
Mode
Recorder 1–3
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different
(default: Recorder 1) IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press
and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a
recorder with the same ID.
AV. Link
This Recorder
Only •
Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are not
passed through to the AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for connected
devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is not passed
through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 128) to Off.
DivX VOD
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video compatibility
on page 47 and DivX® VOD content on page 47.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick Preview •
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from
throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from
the beginning.)
Normal
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.
Additional information about the TV system
settings
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
About the input line system
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour
System setting also changes (see below).
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input
Colour System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an external input or
the built-in TV tuner.
Please note the following points when changing the
input line system:
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is
set to Decoder, then the L2 input is affected instead.
• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel STOP button then pressing OPEN/
CLOSE (also front panel) while the recorder is
stopped.
• When you switch the Input Line System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
STOP button and OPEN/CLOSE buttons as
described above, there is no confirmation, so please
use with care.
134
En
About NTSC on PAL TV
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table
below.
Input Line
System
NTSC on PAL Output when
TV
stopped
625 System
Off
PAL
On
PAL
Off
NTSC
On
PAL–60
525 System
The Initial Setup menu
15
About the input colour system
Input Line
System
Built-in tuner External input
625 System
Auto
Auto
PAL
PAL
SECAM
SECAM
n/a
Auto
Selecting other languages for
language options
English
The available options of the Input Colour System setting
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below
shows the different options available.
ENTER
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
ENTER
525 System
2
Select the language you want.
3.58 NTSC
Initial Setup
PAL–60
OSD
Tuner
Audio Language
Language
Subtitle Language
Number
Auto Language
Video In/Out
Audio In
Additional information about component
video output
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to
Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with
progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and
hold the STOP button on the front panel, then press
PLAY. This will set the recorder’s video output back to
Interlace.
DVD Menu Language
Basic
Audio Out
Language
Language
English
0
5
1
4
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
Recording
Playback
• Select by language name: Use the / buttons to
change the language.
• Select by code number: Press then use the
number buttons to enter the four-digit language
code.
See Language code list on page 146 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
135
En
Additional information
16
Chapter 16
Additional information
Using the TV remote control buttons
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table on the following
page.
Button
What it does
TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
INPUT
Press to change the TV’s video input
1
TV VOLUME
Use to adjust the TV volume
TV CHANNEL
Use to change TV channels
Switch on your TV.
2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
enter the maker code for your TV.
See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes.
If there is more than one code given for your make, input
the first one in the list.
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
3 Point the remote towards your TV and press
TV to check that the remote works with your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off.
If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
136
En
Additional information
16
Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using.
ACURA 644
ADMIRAL 631
AIWA 660
AKAI 632, 635, 642
AKURA 641
ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644
AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647
ANITECH 644
ASA 645
ASUKA 641
AUDIOGONIC 607, 636
BASIC LINE 641, 644
BAUR 631, 607, 642
BEKO 638
BEON 607
BLAUPUNKT 631
BLUE SKY 641
BLUE STAR 618
BPL 618
BRANDT 636
BTC 641
BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647,
656
CASCADE 644
CATHAY 607
CENTURION 607
CGB 642
CIMLINE 644
CLARIVOX 607
CLATRONIC 638
CONDOR 638
CONTEC 644
CROSLEY 632
CROWN 638, 644
CRYSTAL 642
CYBERTRON 641
DAEWOO 607, 644, 656
DAINICHI 641
DANSAI 607
DAYTON 644
DECCA 607, 648
DIXI 607, 644
DUMONT 653
ELIN 607
ELITE 641
ELTA 644
EMERSON 642
ERRES 607
FERGUSON 607, 636, 651
FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655
FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648,
653, 654, 655
FIRSTLINE 640, 644
FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645
FORMENTI 632, 607, 642
FRONTECH 631, 642, 646
FRONTECH/PROTECH 632
FUJITSU 648, 629
FUNAI 640, 646, 658
GBC 632, 642
GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618
GEC 607, 634, 648
GELOSO 632, 644
GENEXXA 631, 641
GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650
GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656
GORENJE 638
GPM 641
GRAETZ 631, 642
GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648
GRADIENTE 630, 657
GRANDIN 618
GRUNDIG 631, 653
HANSEATIC 607, 642
HCM 618, 644
HINARI 607, 641, 644
HISAWA 618
HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654,
606, 610, 624, 625, 618
HUANYU 656
HYPSON 607, 618, 646
ICE 646, 647
IMPERIAL 638, 642
INDIANA 607
INGELEN 631
INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642
INTERVISION 646, 649
ISUKAI 641
ITC 642
ITT 631, 632, 642
JEC 605
JVC 613, 623
KAISUI 618, 641, 644
KAPSCH 631
KENDO 642
KENNEDY 632, 642
KORPEL 607
KOYODA 644
LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648
LIESENK&TTER 607
LOEWE 607
LUXOR 632, 642, 643
M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655,
656, 607, 636, 651
MAGNADYNE 632, 649
MAGNAFON 649
MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629
MANESTH 639, 646
MARANTZ 607
MARK 607
MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648
MEDIATOR 607
MEMOREX 644
METZ 631
MINERVA 631, 653
MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631
MULTITECH 644, 649
NEC 659
NECKERMANN 631, 607
NEI 607, 642
NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648
NOBLIKO 649
NOKIA 632, 642, 652
NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652
OCEANIC 631, 632, 642
ORION 632, 607, 639, 640
OSAKI 641, 646, 648
OSO 641
OSUME 648
OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642
PALLADIUM 638
PANAMA 646
PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622
PATHO CINEMA 642
PAUSA 644
PHILCO 632, 642
PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656
PHOENIX 632
PHONOLA 607
PROFEX 642, 644
PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649
QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653
R-LINE 607
RADIOLA 607
RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602
RBM 653
RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662,
609
REDIFFUSION 632, 642
REX 631, 646
ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646
SABA 631, 636, 642, 651
SAISHO 639, 644, 646
SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643
SAMBERS 649
SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646
SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614
SBR 607, 634
SCHAUB LORENZ 642
SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647
SEG 642, 646
MCMICHAEL 634
SEI 632, 640, 649
SELECO 631, 642
SHARP 602, 619, 627
SIAREM 632, 649
SIEMENS 631
SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649
SKANTIC 643
SOLAVOX 631
SONOKO 607, 644
SONOLOR 631, 635
SONTEC 607
SONY 604
SOUNDWAVE 607
STANDARD 641, 644
STERN 631
SUSUMU 641
SYSLINE 607
TANDY 631, 641, 648
TASHIKO 634
TATUNG 607, 648
TEC 642
TELEAVIA 636
TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652
TELETECH 644
TENSAI 640, 641
THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663
THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648
TOMASHI 618
TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653
TOWADA 642
ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649
UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646,
654, 655
VESTEL 607
VICTOR 613
VOXSON 631
WALTHAM 643
WATSON 607
WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE 607
YOKO 607, 642, 646
ZENITH 603, 620
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651
English
TV Preset code list
137
En
16
Additional information
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. 1 Check with the disc manufacturer for
compatibility.
DVD disc type
DVD-R / 4 x
DVD-RW / 4 x
DVD+R / 4 x
DVD+RW / 4 x
DVD-R / 8 x / 16 x
DVD-RW / 6 x
DVD+R / 8 x / 16 x
DVD+RW / 8 x
3x
4x
6x
*1
2 mins.
1.5 mins.*1
1.25 mins.*1
4 mins.
*1
2.5 mins.
2 mins.*1
1.6 mins.*1
10 mins.
5 mins.
*1
3.5 mins.
2.5 mins.*1
2.2 mins.*1
4h
15 mins.
7.5 mins.
6.3 mins.
5 mins.
4 mins.
3 mins.
SP
2h
30 mins.
15 mins.
12.5 mins.
10 mins.
7.5 mins.
5.5 mins.
XP
1h
60 mins.
30 mins.
25 mins.
20 mins.
15 mins.
11 mins.
DVD-R / 1 x
DVD-RW / 1 x
DVD-RW / 2 x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM / 2 x
DVD+R / 2.4 x
DVD+RW / 2.4 x
DVD+R DL
DVD-RAM / 3 x
DVD-RAM / 5 x
1x
2x
2.4 x
SEP 10 h
6 mins.
3 mins.
SLP 8 h
7.5 mins.
EP
6h
LP
Rec
mode
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6 x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2 x speed).
138
En
Additional information
16
The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD types in each manual
recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD),
DVD+R/+RW
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD)
Resolution*1
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
Level
English
Manual recording modes
Rec. time
Level
Rec. time
MN 1
802 mins.
MN 1 *2,3
802 mins.
MN 2
720 mins.
MN 2
*2,3
720 mins.
MN 3
600 mins.
SEP
MN 3
*2,3
600 mins.
MN 4
480 mins.
SLP
MN 4
*3
480 mins.
MN 5
420 mins.
MN 5 *3
420 mins.
MN 6
360 mins.
360 mins.
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
MN 6 *3
MN 7
MN 8
MN 9
MN 10
MN 11
MN 12
MN 13
MN 14
MN 15
MN 16
MN 17
MN 18
MN 19
MN 20
MN 21
MN 22
MN 23
MN 24
MN 25
MN 26
MN 27
MN 28
MN 29
MN 30
MN 31
MN 32
LPCM
EP
LP
SP
XP
300 mins.
270 mins.
240 mins.
230 mins.
220 mins.
210 mins.
200 mins.
190 mins.
180 mins.
170 mins.
160 mins.
150 mins.
140 mins.
130 mins.
120 mins.
110 mins.
105 mins.
100 mins.
95 mins.
90 mins.
85 mins.
80 mins.
75 mins.
70 mins.
65 mins.
61 mins.
61 mins.
Resolution*1
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
*1
The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*3
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
*2
•
•
•
•
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to one recordable DVD).
See also Recording on page 75.
139
En
16
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
140
En
Problem
Remedy
The disc is automatically
ejected after closing the
disc tray
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 45).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 147).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 45).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 147).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the
condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected
recordings will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 45).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 85). This
can take up to 1 hour.
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 50).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to interlace
by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then pressing PLAY.
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the
settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.
Remote control does not
work
• If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack,
point the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 17).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 134). (When the
batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 17).
• Replace the batteries (page 17).
No sound or sound is distorted
• Make sure that the receiver subwoofer or TV is set to the correct input and the volume
turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play.
Press PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder’s digital output is connected to the
receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS decoder for you to
be able to enjoy DTS sound.
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 50).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a bilingual
program
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub
channels are both output.
Additional information
Remedy
The picture from the
external input is distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect
via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 134). (You can also change it by pressing
the STOP button and OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel simultaneously with the
recorder stopped.)
English
Problem
16
Screen is stretched vertically • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 133) is correct for the kind of TV you
or horizontally
have (see also page 139).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input
signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen
signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded
using this recorder on
another player
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 84).
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode
and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 45).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible
players (page 76).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on
other players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the picture • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly.
is dark or distorted
Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t record or does not
record successfully
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
• For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 123).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has
already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When
recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match
what you want to record (page 134).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn’t
record successfully
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner,
not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected cannot
be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 76).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record
completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or
after a power failure the
front panel display shows ‘-:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being
reset when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the
battery keeps all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other
recorder settings to use the recorder again.
Front panel display shows
‘LOCK’ when a button is
pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 81).
141
En
16
Additional information
Problem
Remedy
Can’t use One Touch Copy
(HDD to DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a Video
mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for
recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles
may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc
menu on the disc you’re trying to use.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch
Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over 8 hours long when copying to DVD+R/
+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to
DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy
(DVD to HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999
titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the
front panel and remote
control buttons stop
working
• Press STOP then try restarting playback.
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back
on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON
for 5 seconds until the power switches off.
A device connected via USB • Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital camera, USB
does to function.
memory, memory card reader or printer).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader connected is
readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and connect the device you want to use
first.
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
142
En
Additional information
16
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message
Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder
automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and
so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management
data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of
chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or
combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the
finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the
disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization
successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. If
the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new
disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear
if the disc is dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM
compatible.
• Cannot record this content using Video
mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to
DVD+R/+RW.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW
disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be
damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the
power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating
limit. If this message reappears, please contact a Pioneer authorized
service center.
• There is no DV input or the input signal
is unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank
section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This
can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to
maintain playback and recording performance.
English
On-screen displays and recorder displays
143
En
16
144
En
Additional information
Message
Explanation/Action
• Please perform HDD optimization. This
can be done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain
performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized. Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely
that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to
complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize
again.
• This channel’s TV system is different
from the recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from
the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system
mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear
message.
The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for
recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV
system is different than the recording.
During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL, NTSC,
etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop
automatically.
No DV camcorder connected.
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder.
Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then turn it back on again.
Could not operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.
The DV camcorder is not set for playback.
Please select playback mode on the DV
camcorder.
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode.
Searching for printer. Please wait a
moment.
This message is displayed when the recorder is scanning for a
connected printer, or when the printer is not yet ready for printing. If
there is no printer connected, please connect one.
The printer is not ready or there is no
printer connected. Please check the
printer status.
This message is displayed when communication could not be
established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you do not
know the cause.
Printing has stopped because ...
This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing.
After checking the printer for the cause of the error, select “Yes” to
resume printing. Select “No” to cancel the print job. See also the
operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of
print errors.
The print job has been canceled because
...
This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing.
After checking the printer for the cause of the error, reconnect the printer
and start the printing job again. See also the operating instructions that
came with your printer for possible causes of print errors.
Additional information
16
About DV
DVR-640H-AV only:
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you
can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit / 48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit /
32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see
DV Input on page 130).
English
• It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48
kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.
• You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output
functionality.
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc
Setting
Appearance
16:9
4:3 (Letter Box)
The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented correctly on either setting.
4:3
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc
Setting
Appearance
16:9
16:9
The program is presented in widescreen.
4:3
16:9
Your TV will determine how the picture is presented—
check the manual that came with the TV for details.
145
En
16
Additional information
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
146
En
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Additional information
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
English
Handling discs
16
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a
circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
Hints on installation
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
Do...
Damaged discs
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heatgenerating appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
147
En
Additional information
16
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Specifications
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
General
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/
ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at
least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord.
Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording—
discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged.
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.
2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold STOP and press STANDBY/ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
148
En
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Power consumption
DVR-640H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 W
DVR-440H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 W
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.61 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight
DVR-640H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 kg
DVR-440H-AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 kg
Dimensions
DVR-640H-AV . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 69 mm (H) x 318 mm (D)
DVR-440H-AV . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 69 mm (H) x 318 mm (D)
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 %
(no condensation)
TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PAL/SECAM/
NTSC (external input only)
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, Video
CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Video recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD
DVR-640H-AV (160 GB)
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 34 to 455 h
DVR-440H-AV (80 GB)
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 170 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h to 227 h
Additional information
16
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m
Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Tuner
Receivable channels
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
Channel
E2 to E4
X to Z
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12
S1 to S20
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM L
PAL I
Frequency
44 MHz to 89 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
Channel
A to C
X to Z
D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
VHF (low)
Frequency
49 MHz to 65 MHz
Channel
FB, FC1, FC
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
Channel
R1 to R5
VHF (high)
104 MHz to 300 MHz
F1 to F6
B to Q
104 MHz to 300 MHz
R6 to R12
S1 to S20
Hyper
UHF
300 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to 69
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (IEC connector)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 2 (front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2)
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 2 (front)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2)
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Component video output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
RGB input
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1)
RGB output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 2 (front) L/R
Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
During audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Digital audio ouptut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial
DV input (DVR-640H-AV only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
USB (DVR-640H-AV only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)
English
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h
149
En
16
Additional information
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to
a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no.
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
Supplied accessories
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to
change without notice, due to improvement.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced
by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved .
150
En
English
151
En
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
Printed in
K002_A_En
<AREXXXX-A>
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising